Harmonic MCT - Harmonic Inc

Harmonic MCT
Mass Configuration Tool
Software Guide
VERSION 11.2.0.X
NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G
Rev B

Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of
this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such
contract or warranty. The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for
sale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products described
herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license under
any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic. Nothing hereunder constitutes a
representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

Documentation Conventions
This manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information. The
following symbols appear throughout this manual:
DANGER: The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can cause physical
harm to you.
CAUTION: The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can adversely affect
the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult.
LASER DANGER: The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the
lasers in this product that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you.
NOTE: The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from
heeding. It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need, or it
may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances.
TIP: The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing
a given procedure, but which, if followed, might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier,
smoother, or more efficient.
In addition to these symbols, this manual uses the following text conventions:
Data Entry: indicates text you enter at the keyboard.
User Interface: indicates a button to click, a menu item to select, or a key or key sequence
to press.
Screen Output: shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a
computer screen.
Bold: indicates the definition of a new term.
Italics: used for emphasis, cross-references, and hyperlinked cross-references in online
documents.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 MCT Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Installing MCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.3 Integrating MCT in a Firewalled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Starting MCT and Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Changing MCT Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.2 Reverting to the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 2 MCT User Interface
2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.1 MCT Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1.2 MCT Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1.3 Device Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1.5 MCT Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1.6 MCT Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1.7 MCT Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1.8 MCT Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1.9 Device Information Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1.10 Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.1 Selecting Multiple Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.2 Selecting Multiple Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.3 Copying and Pasting Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Chapter 3 MCT Basics
3.1 Managing MCT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1.1 MCT Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1.2 Creating a New Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1.4 Working with Previous MCT Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Managing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3 Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.1 Understanding the Editor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.2 Adding a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.3.4 Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 1 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table of Contents
3.3.5 Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.6 Deleting an NSG Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware . . . . 34
3.5 Finding the Parameters You Want. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.5.1 Find Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.6 Getting to Know the MCT Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.1 Launching NSG Web Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.2 Resetting NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.3 Setting the Internal NSG Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6.4 Changing NSG Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6.5 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.6.6 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.6.7 Action Status Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.7.1 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G 45
3.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.8 MCT and NSGs Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.8.1 Comparing Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.8.2 Synchronizing Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.9 Exporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.9.1 Exporting to NMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.9.4 Exporting Device Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.10 RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.11 Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.12.1 Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.13.1 Understanding the Licensing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.14 Authentication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below)
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.3 Configuring Input Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.4 Configuring Operation Mode Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.4.1 PID Remapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 2 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table of Contents
4.5 Configuring Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.5.1 Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and 9116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5.2 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.5.3 Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.5.4 Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.6 Defining NGOD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.8 Configuring SNMP Managers and Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.8.1 Configuring SNMP Parameters for NSG 8108 and 9116 . . . . . . . . 97
4.8.2 Configuring SNMP - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.9 Generating Access Control List (ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.10.1 Configuring DVB CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.10.2 Privacy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.10.3 Configuring PM Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.10.4 Configuring Privacy Mode Parameters per NSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.2 RF Module Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.4 Configuring Redundancy Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.5 Configuring VOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.6 Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.6.1 Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.7 Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication . . . . . . . . . 119
5.8 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.9 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.10 Broadcast Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.10.1 Defining a Passthrough Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.10.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.10.3 Defining PID Remux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.11 Configuring M-CMTS Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.12 Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . 128
5.13 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.14 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 3 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table of Contents
6.4.2 Input Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.5.1 QAM-RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.6 RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.6.1 RF Module Redundancy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.6.2 Enabling the RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.6.3 Reverting Redundancy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.7.1 EdgeCluster Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.7.3 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.7.5 Working with Devices in EdgeCluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.7.6 EdgeCluster Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.8 Configuring VOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
6.9 Configuring SDV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.10.1 Defining Virtual ISA Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.11 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.13 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.14 Configuring Broadcast Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.14.1 Defining Passthrough Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.14.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.14.3 Defining PID Remux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.14.4 PID Range Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6.17 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.17.2 Configuring PM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.18 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.19 Device Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G
7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.9 Configuring the VOD Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.10 Configuring SDV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 4 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table of Contents
7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.12 Defining Virtual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.12.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.12.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.12.3 Creating Virtual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.13 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.14 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
7.15 Configuring Broadcast Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.15.1 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.15.2 Defining PID Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.16 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.18 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.19 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors
A.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 5 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1.1 Overview
Chapter 1
Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction
The Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) provides a method to rapidly configure a large number of
Network Services Gateways (NSGs) through single application. With the MCT you can plan
and record NSG configuration data offline, even before the NSGs are installed. Configuration
details for each NSG are stored in an MCT database and downloaded to the NSGs over
Ethernet.
Use MCT for the following purposes:
To make a template of the standard NSG configuration
To download the set configuration to all the NSGs in your network
To download NSG firmware to NSGs
To migrate between MCT versions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page 10.
1.2 MCT Installation
The following items are shipped on the MCT CD:
MCT setup files
A PDF file of this user’s guide and additional documentation
1.2.1 System Requirements
Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements
Component Component Details Minimum Requirements
Processor Type Intel Core 2 duo or equivalent
Frequency 2.4GHz
Processor Bus Speed 533MHz
RAM RAM 4GBytes
Drives Hard Drive 40GBytes
CD-ROM X52, Internal
Video Adapter Interface PCI or AGP 2X
Resolution 1280 x 768
Video Monitor Size 20" or larger
Resolution 1024 x 768, 75Hz
Ports Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2 ports, USB 1.0 or 2.0
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 6 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction MCT Installation
Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements
NOTE: When using MCT as ERS proxy in a Privacy Mode enabled system, MCT should have connectivity
to the NSG devices as well as the ERS (via the internet)
NOTE: Harmonic strongly recommends not to install any additional software application(s) with the
exception of NMX, on the MCT PC. Although no inter-operability issues are known, Harmonic can not
guarantee correct operation of the MCT on a PC with other applications.
1.2.2 Installing MCT
Component Component Details Minimum Requirements
Network Adapter One port, 10/100 Base-T
Operating System The following options are supported:
Windows 2003 Server 32-bit (English)
Windows XP SP3 (English)
Windows 2000 Workstation or Server (English)
Microsoft .NET
Framework
Microsoft .NET Framework version 2.0
1. Close all running applications on the computer.
2. Insert the MCT software CD into the CD drive.
An installation menu opens listing the items you can install.
3. From the installation menu, select MCT Setup.
4. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation and reboot the computer
when the installation completes.
By default, the application is installed in the following location:
MCT - C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 10.x. (x stands for a real number, per
software version)
The folder Harmonic\MCT is added to the Start menu of your computer
The following shortcut is added to the desktop.
NOTE: MCT 9.x.x and up unifies MCT and MCT PM into a single software package.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 7 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In
1.2.3 Integrating MCT in a Firewalled Network
To allow MCT to communicate with other devices in a firewalled network, open the ports
listed in the following table. Make sure to adjust your firewall to work with the TCP ports:
Table 1-2: Required Open Ports
Port Comment Explanation
Port 21 Standard FTP
port
Port 80 Standard HTTP
port
Port 23 Standard Telnet
port
Port 443 Standard HTTPs
port
1.3 Starting MCT and Logging In
To prevent unauthorized access to sensitive configuration data, MCT requires users to login
using a specific user name and password.
The default user name and password are predefined as configure and are case sensitive. The
user name is fixed and may not be changed.
To Start MCT and to Login
1. In your desktop, double click the MCT icon,
Or
Select Start > Programs > Harmonic > MCT> MCT 10.x.x
The following dialog appears:
2. In Password, enter configure, the default password.
3. Click Ok.
Allows MCT to connect to the FTP server for firmware
upgrade of NSG 9000, NSG 9116 and NSG 8108 devices
Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices and
License Manager.
Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices using the
Telnet protocol.
For NSG 9000-6G and NSG 9000-40G devices:
allows communication with HTTPs server
Allows communication with Motorola ERS.
MCT opens and you can start configuring the NSGs. To configure, create or open a
database. For details see, 3.1.2.1 Opening a Database on page 27.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 8 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In
1.3.1 Changing MCT Password
NOTE: This feature is unsupported for NSG 9000-40G.
1. Click MCT button.
2. The following screen appears:
1. Click MCT Options.
2. Select the General tab.
3. Click Change MCT Configure Password.
MCT Options
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 9 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version
The following dialog opens:
4. Enter the data for the current password, the new requested password and re-enter the
new password for verification.
5. Click Change.
1.3.2 Reverting to the Default Password
Click to get a
temporary password
If for any reason you need to revert back to the default password, execute the following steps:
1. Start the MCT application
In the MCT Login dialog, click Lost Password.:
A message box window opens with a unique Request Code.
2. Contact Harmonic Customer Support and submit the Request code.
You will receive a temporary password from Harmonic Customer Support.
NOTE: The password provided is valid for that day and expires at midnight.
3. Enter the temporary password given in the Reset Code box. You are asked if you really
want to set the password to it’s default.
4. Select Yes. A text box appears stating that a Password has been set to it’s default setting.
5. Run MCT using its default password.
1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version
You can add NSGs organized in older databases to databases of higher MCT versions by
importing the management IP addresses of the NSGs into your current MCT database. If the
IP addresses are organized in sites, you may choose whether to import sites hierarchy as well,
or only NSG IP addresses. Once the IP address is added, you need to configure the imported
devices.
To import NSGs from previous databases
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 10 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version
1. To import NSGs into a specific site, select that site. Otherwise, select the root node of the
tree view.
2. Click MCT button.
3. Select Import > Import NSG IPs.
The Open MCT File dialog appears.
4. Browse to the required MCT database and click Open.
If the IP addresses are organized in sites, you are asked whether to import the site tree as
well.
Click Yes to import the IP addresses with the site tree.
Click No, to import the IP addresses without the site tree.
The IP addresses of the NSGs included in the imported database appear under the
specified site (if selected in step 1), or under a temporary site called Imported NSGs.
5. To arrange the imported NSGs, you can drag and drop in the required site.
6. Configure the newly added NSGs.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 11 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI
The MCT User Interface is comprised of the following:
MCT button - see 2.1.1 MCT Button on page 13
Quick Access Tool Bar - see 2.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar on page 15
Title Bar - see 2.1.5 MCT Title Bar on page 16
MCT Tabs bar - see 2.1.6 MCT Tabs on page 16
Navigation pane - see 2.1.8 MCT Navigation Pane on page 18
Device Information - see 2.1.9 Device Information Section on page 19
Details - see 2.1.10 Details Section on page 19
MCT button Quick Access toolbar MCT tabs Title bar MCT ribbon
Device filters Tree view of database
Find Tab or Column
Chapter 2
MCT User Interface
Details
Device Information
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 12 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
2.1.1 MCT Button
Click the MCT button to open, save, import, export and much more. The following table lists
the options the MCT button offers:
Table 2-1: MCT Button
2.1.2 MCT Options
Menu Explanation
New allows to open a new database
Open allows to open an existing database
Import allows to import the management IPs of NSGs arranged
in another database
Save allows to save the database
Save As allows to save a copy of the database
Export allows to export to the following:
NMX, see
SBSS template file
USRM template file
Device uptime
MCT Options allows to access general MCT properties, MCT defaults,
supported versions and logs.
Exit allows to quit the MCT program
To access MCT Options, do the following:
1. Click MCT Button.
The following dialog appears:
2. Click MCT Options.
Click MCT Options
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 13 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
The following dialog appears:
3. In the Navigation pane, select the required option. The following table lists the available
option and its features:
Table 2-2:
2.1.3 Device Timeout
Option Explanation
General Allows to set the following:
Tree view, see 3.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGs on page 26
EdgeCluster ribbon group, see 6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster
Configuration on page 144
MCT configure password, see 1.3.1 Changing MCT Password
on page 9.
Device timeout, see 2.1.3 Device Timeout on page 14.
Versions Allows to select the required version. See 3.4.1 Customizing the
List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.
Custom UDP Mapping Allows to set custom UDP mapping files. See 3.12 Creating
Custom QAM Mapping File on page 60.
MCT allows you to set the time for device timeout. If MCT tries to connect with a device and
the indicated device timeout period of time has elapsed, MCT sends an error message.
By default, the timeout is 200000 msec which is an optimized time for MCT device
communication.
CAUTION: Do not change device timeout, unless your network is very slow and communication
between MCT and the devices is affected.
To define device timeout
1. Click MCT Button.
2. Click MCT Options.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 14 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
The following dialog appears:
3. Focus on General Properties.
4. In NSG Communication Timeout (msec.), enter the required value in milli seconds.
2.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar
Quick Access bar
The Quick Access Toolbar allows to open a new database and to save a database:
Table 2-3: Quick Access Toolbar
New Save Help Customize
Buttons Explanation
Allows to open a new database.
Allows to save a database.
Allows to access the online help.
Allows to customize the location of the
quick access bar and ribbon.
NSG
communication
timeout
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 15 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
2.1.5 MCT Title Bar
MCT version Current user Full path of the current database
The MCT Title bar includes the following information:
Currently installed MCT version
Logged in user
Full path of the database
2.1.6 MCT Tabs
MCT is furnished with two tabs:
Home - includes main MCT commands
Privacy Mode - includes commands related to Motorola Privacy Mode (PM) real-time
encryption
Licensing - It includes commands to allow locating licensing records spread across
different NSGs at different sites. This tab is available in NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG9000-
6G filters only.
Authentication - allows to enter username and password for RADIUS server (Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service). This tab is available in NSG9000-6G filter only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 16 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
2.1.7 MCT Ribbon
The MCT Ribbon helps to quickly find the commands that you need. Commands are
organized in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs. Currently MCT includes
the following tabs:
Table 2-4: MCT Tabs and Commands
2.1.7.1 Minimizing the Ribbon
Tab Command Group Explanation
Home Clipboard Allows to cut, copy and paste cells. See page 21.
Editor Allows to add site/device, delete site/device, add a
range of devices, clone and clone a range. See
page 29.
Actions Allows to launch device GUI, download firmware,
reset device, set device clock and change a
password. See page 37.
Firmware
Installation
1. Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar.
2. In the menu that opens, click Minimize the Ribbon.
Allows to download firmware. See page page 44.
Synchronization Allows to get from device, send to device and
compare with device. See page 53.
Distribute Allows to send the alarms configuration of a specific
device to other devices. See page 60.
RF Module
Redundancy
Allows to enable and configure QAM-RF module
redundancy. See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on
page 141.
EdgeCluster Allows to work in edgeCluster mode. See
6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters on page 144.
Privacy Mode ECM Allows to update and purge ECMs. See page 104.
Options Allows to define PM parameters. See page 105.
ERS
Communication
Allows to define ERS and NSG communication
parameters. See page 106.
VODS Allows to define VODS parameters. See page 106.
Licensing Licensing Allows to query Harmonic’s database for licensing
information.
Authentication RADIUS
Credentials
Allows to enter username and password for RADIUS
authentication. See page 68.
The Ribbon disappears except for the tabs.
3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the tab you want to use.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 17 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
2.1.8 MCT Navigation Pane
The Navigation pane includes the following sections:
A tree view section - shows in a tree view, the currently open MCT database.
Filters section - includes the following buttons to view a site via one of the following filters:
NSG 9000-40G - shows NSG 9000-40G devices only
NSG 9000-6G - shows NSG 9000-6G devices only
NSG 9000 - shows NSG 9000 devices only
NSG 8108 - shows NSG 8108 devices only
NSG 9116 - shows NSG 9116 devices only
For further details, see 3.2 Managing Sites on page 26.
2.1.8.1 Removing the Navigation Pane
To show/hide navigation pane:
Minimized
navigation pane
1. In the navigation pane click Show/Hide button.
The navigation pane is minimized to the side as the following picture shows:
2. To show the navigation pane, hover your mouse over the minimized navigation pane and
once the Show icon appears, click it to show the navigation pane.
To enlarge the Tree View section
1. Hover your mouse pointer over this icon .
2. Once the mouse pointer changes into a double sided arrow, drag it down to enlarge the
tree view section or up to down size it.
Hover the mouse pointer over
this icon
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 18 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
2.1.9 Device Information Section
Click the title bar to select it
This section displays the devices of the selected site. When selected, it enables options in the
Ribbon that allow you to configure the devices.
To select the Device Information section
Click the Title bar of the Device Information section. The color of the title bar changes to
orange.
Use the Device Information section to select a device and to view/define the device
information. See 3.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information on page 33.
2.1.10 Details Section
The Details section includes the tabs relevant to the NSG according to the selected Baseline
firmware version.
Click the title bar to select it
To select the Details section
Click the Title bar of the Details section. The color of the title bar changes to orange.
2.1.10.1 Using the Details Section
When working with the Details section, the buttons Back, Forward and Sort in the Editor group
are enabled.
The following table lists the buttons and explains their functionality:
Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section
Button Explanation
Back Returns to the last tab, previous row and column.
You can go back up to 10 previous tabs.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 19 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI
Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section
Button Explanation
Forward Once you click Back, Forward in enabled. It moves you
forward to the previous tab prior to clicking Back.
Find Allows to search the Details section. See page 35.
Sort Arranges the virtual devices according to the virtual device
index.
In the Details sections there are linked parameters. These parameters link you to other tabs
which provide information on the parameter. For example, in the Details section you are
working with the RF tab. The Slot No. parameter is a linked parameter.
RF Ports tab is selected Slot No. is a linked
parameter.
Once you click on the required linked slot, MCT displays the RF Module tab with the required
slot record selected.
RF Module tab is selected The record of Slot No. 2 is selected to
display related slot information
You can view information on the selected slot. To return to the RF tab, click Back in Editor
group.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 20 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools
2.2 Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools
The Editing tools are organized in the Clipboard group.
To ease the NSG configuration using MCT, MCT is designed as an Excel sheet. As in Excel,
pay attention to the following:
Select All button - click this button to select all the grid
Select All button
Column Heading - indicates whether an attribute in the row is selected or whether the whole
row is selected:
Column Heading - attribute is
selected
For additional icons that may appear in the Row heading, see 3.6.7.2 Reading Action Status
Icons on page 43.
2.2.1 Selecting Multiple Rows
You can apply an MCT operation to multiple rows. For example, you can send configuration
details to multiple NSGs in a single operation by first selecting the rows you want to send.
To select multiple rows
1. In Device Information/Details, place the mouse pointer on the required row heading and
drag it along the required row headings until the last required row and release the mouse.
To select all rows
1. Do either of the following:
Click Ctrl+A.
Column Heading - the whole
row is selected
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 21 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools
Click Select All button
Select All button
2.2.2 Selecting Multiple Cells
To select a range of cells, do either of the following:
Using mouse - click the first cell in the range, and then drag the mouse pointer to the last
cell.
Using keyboard - click the first cell in the range, and then hold down while
pressing the arrow keys to extend the selection.
2.2.3 Copying and Pasting Cells
In any page, you can select cells across columns and rows, copy them, and paste them into
other rows across the same columns. For example, you can select a group of cells spanning,
say, five columns and three rows, and paste the selected data into another set of three rows,
or a multiple of 3, across the same five columns.
To select cells
1. Click on a cell.
A frame surrounds the cell.
2. Do either of the following:
Use Shift+click or Shift+Ctrl+click to select additional cells,
Or
Drag the mouse across rows and columns.
To copy and paste
1. Highlight the cells you want to copy.
2. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy or press Ctrl-C.
3. Select the section into which to paste the copied data.
The number of rows you select determines the extent of the operation. For example, if
you copy three rows and then select six rows, the copied data is duplicated over the six
rows; if you copy one cell and then select the column by clicking its heading, MCT copies
the data to all the cells in that column.
4. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Paste or press Ctrl-V.
2.2.3.1 Editing Cells
1. Double click the cell to be edited.
2. Edit the cell.
3. To apply changes, click .
4. To cancel changes, click .
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 22 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools
2.2.3.2 Copying to/from Excel
You can select cells or rows and copy them to/from Excel. However, when copying from
Excel to any page of MCT, invalid values are rejected and are not updated in MCT.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 23 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.1 Managing MCT Database
3.1.1 MCT Database Files
Chapter 3
MCT Basics
Configuration records are stored in an MCT database. You can maintain multiple databases to
store different sets of configuration records for separate groups of NSGs, sites or networks.
The database may contain records of various types of NSGs all of which are part of a site or
network.
All database files have the *.mct extension and by default are stored in the default installation
location in the DB folder; C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 9.0\DB.
3.1.2 Creating a New Database File
You can create a new database or create a new database that is based on an existing
database.
To create a new database
Do either of the following:
In the Quick Access Bar, click New File.
Or,
Click MCT button and select New.
The MCT screen is updated to present a new database:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 24 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing MCT Database
To create a database file based on another database file
1. Open an existing database.
2. Click MCT button.
3. Click Save As.
4. In Save MCT File dialog, do the following:
select the required location for saving the new database
enter the required name for the new database.
5. Click Save.
The new file is now the current one. Now you can change template and the configuration
records.
After creating or opening a database file, the NSG type and the database filename appear on
the MCT window's title bar, along with the MCT's version number.
3.1.2.1 Opening a Database
MCT version, current logged in user, database name and path
To open a database
1. Click MCT button.
2. Do either of the following:
In Recent Documents, select the required database.
3.
Or,
Click Open.
1. Navigate to the required location and select the database.
2. Click Open.
3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases
You should regularly back up the MCT database files to protect against hard disk failure or
corruption.
The file carries the name you assigned to it followed by the .mct extension.
To back up an MCT database:
1. On the MCT computer, navigate to the directory your MCT database files are stored. The
default directory is: C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\Data\DB.
2. Copy the database files (.mct) to removable media.
3.1.4 Working with Previous MCT Databases
For detailed instructions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page 10.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 25 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites
3.2 Managing Sites
The Navigation pane allows you to manage and browse through the databases. The
Navigation pane is divided into the following two sections:
Database Tree view - allows to arrange the database by creating sites and managing the
NSG devices in each site
Filters - allows to view the database via the NSG type filter. To view all NSG types, see
3.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters on page 27.
3.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGs
The tree view includes three node types. The following table lists the various nodes, their
graphical sign and explains the tree view hierarchy:
Table 3-1:
Tree view section
Filters
Graphical Sign Node Type Explanation
MCT Select to add a site
Site Select to add a device
NSG Select to add another device to
the site
3.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site
To add a new site
1. Select the MCT site.
2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Add.
A new site is added to the tree.
3. Enter a required name and press .
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 26 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites
To rename a site
1. Select the required site.
2. Click the site.
The site name becomes editable.
3. Type the required name.
To delete a site
1. In the tree view, select the required site.
2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Delete.
3.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters
The filters located at the bottom of the Navigation pane, define which NSG types appear in
the database. By default, the tree view shows all sites included in the database with NSG
9000 devices, as NSG 9000 is the default filter.
Once you select a filter, the Navigation pane is updated according to the selected device and
only these devices are enabled in the Navigation pane and their parameters can be
configured.
You can also view all devices in a site regardless of the selected filter as explained in
3.2.3.1 Viewing Sites with All Device Types on page 28. If you selected to view all device types
in tree view, device types other than the selected filter appear in the tree view as disabled
devices.
To view a site with a device filter
Devices included
by filter
Selected filter
1. In the Navigation pane, select a site.
2. In the Navigation pane, click the required filter.
The tabs are updated accordingly and the relevant devices are enabled:
Devices of another
type
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 27 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites
To customize the filters
1. Click the Filter Customizing button.
2. Select one of the following options:
Show More Buttons - click to add more filters
Show Fewer Buttons - click to remove filters
Add Remove Buttons - click to select the filter you wish to remove from the navigation
pane.
3.2.3.1 Viewing Sites with All Device Types
1. Click MCT button.
2. Click MCT Options.
The following dialog appears:
3. Check View all device type in tree view.
To view all devices
in the site, click
here
All NSG devices appear in the site. NSG devices of type other than the selected filter are
italicized and appear in gray.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 28 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
3.3 Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
To configure NSG devices, add them to the MCT database. Once you added an NSG, you can
set its configuration parameters. You can add NSG devices by the following:
A single device with default values
Range of NSG devices with default values
Single NSG device with cloned records
Range of NSG devices with cloned records
All of these options are grouped in the MCT ribbon in the Editor group.
3.3.1 Understanding the Editor Group
The Editor group includes options that are enabled when one of the following is selected as
the picture below shows:
a site
a device
Details section
The following table lists the options with a short explanation:
Table 3-2: Editor Group Parameters
Site is selected - enabled Editor
options
Device is selected - enabled Editor
options
Details section is selected - some
enabled Editor options
Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference
Add MCT node is selected to add a site
Site is selected to add a device.
See, 3.2.2 Adding, Renaming
and Deleting a Site on page 26
See 3.3.2 Adding a Device on
page 30.
Add Range A site is selected. See 3.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs
with Default Values on page 30.
Delete A site is selected to delete a site.
A device is selected to delete a
device.
See, 3.2.2 Adding, Renaming
and Deleting a Site on page 26
See, 3.3.6 Deleting an NSG
Device on page 32
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 29 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
Table 3-2: Editor Group Parameters
Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference
Clone A device is selected See, 3.3.4 Adding a Single Device
with Cloned Values on page 31.
Multi Clone A device is selected See, 3.3.5 Adding a Range of
NSGs with Cloned Values on
page 32.
Set Bulk
Offset
3.3.2 Adding a Device
To add a single device with default values, do the following:
1. Select the site node and click Add.
A new record is created at the bottom of the list. The new record uses default values.
2. Enter values for the parameters that are not part of the template, such as IP and MAC
addresses.
NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique
across the MCT database since it is used to identify the NSG device.
3. Click Save.
3.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values
To create a group of NSG devices with default configuration, use the Add Range option. The
created devices have default configuration as defined in MCT Options > Defaults page. The
Add Range command automatically increments the ETH1 IP address of the new devices, and
allows you to auto-increment the GbE IP addresses as well.
To add a range of NSG records
In M-CMTS tab, an M-CMTS session is
selected.
Sort Virtual Devices (ISA) tab is selected. See
Back Moving between tabs
It allows to return to the last tab you
viewed.
Forward Moving between tabs
It allows to return to the tab you were
on before you clicked the Back button.
Find When one of the MCT page is selected,
such as Device Information, Details,
Navigation pane etc’.
1. Select the site you wish to add to it multiple NSG devices.
2. Click Add Range.
See, Setting DOCSIS Sync
Compensation Offset on
page 128.
See 3.5 Finding the Parameters
You Want on page 35
See 3.5 Finding the Parameters
You Want on page 35
See 3.5.1 Find Feature on
page 35.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 30 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
The Add Range dialog appears:
3. In From IP Address, enter the Eth1 IP address of the first NSG device to be added.
4. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG devices to be added.
5. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.
6. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered
IP address.
7. Click Ok.
To clone a range of NSGs
1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone.
The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears.
2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs.
3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added.
4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.
5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered
IP address.
6. Click OK.
NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records
appear with the same configuration as the cloned device
3.3.4 Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values
If you wish to create an NSG device with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an
existing NSG device, add the device by cloning the record of the existing NSG. Once you
clone the record, modify the information to fit your specific NSG requirements.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 31 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
The clone procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and MAC
addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records.
To clone a single device
1. Select the NSG device whose record you wish to clone.
2. Click Clone.
A record is added to the list of NSGs with the same values as of the source NSG.
3.3.5 Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values
If you wish to create NSG devices with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an
existing NSG device, add the new devices by duplicating the record of the existing NSG.
Once you duplicated the records, modify the information to fit your specific NSG
requirements. MCT allows you to duplicate multiple records in one operation.
The duplication procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and
MAC addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records.
To clone a range of NSGs
1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone.
The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears.
2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs.
3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added.
4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.
5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered
IP address.
6. Click OK.
NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records
appear with the same configuration as the cloned device
3.3.6 Deleting an NSG Device
To delete a device
1. Do one of the following:
Select the device to be removed and click Delete.
The device is deleted from the database and is removed from the Navigation pane.
2. Click Save.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 32 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)
3.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information
As soon as you add a device, enter the Eth1 IP address of the device. The Eth1 IP address
always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique across the MCT
database since it is used for identifying the NSG device.
To enter the Eth1 IP address
1. Do either of the following:
In the Tree View section, type the required Eth1 IP address
Or
In Details, select the Platform tab and in ETH1, enter the required Eth1 IP address.
In Device Details the Eth1 IP address is updated as entered.
Once you have entered the Eth1 IP address of the device, configure the device information
details as explained below. The details should allow to easily identify the device
To define device information
Enter the following details:
Table 3-3: Device Information Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Device Name Enter the name of the device to allow easy
identification of the physical device.
Rack The number of the rack holding this NSG. The Rack
and Slot ID fields are provided so that you can
associate the physical NSG chassis with this entry.
Slot The number of the slot in the rack holding this NSG.
The Rack and Slot ID fields are provided so that you
can associate the physical NSG chassis with this
entry.
Comments Enter any comments to allow easy identification.
NMX Network Group The NMX Network Group (also referred to as Map)
to which this NSG belongs.
Actual Firmware Version View the actual firmware
Expected Firmware Version Select the firmware you wish to download on the
device
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 33 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Supporting Various NSG Versions
3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions
To allow full compatibility between MCT and NSG firmware versions of various NSG types,
MCT is furnished with the Version Support mechanism. This mechanism consists of a table
that lists supported baseline versions and expected versions:
Base line version - a release of an NSG version with a new configuration database structure.
This database may be common also to proceeding releases. These releases are called
Expected versions.
Expected version - a release of an NSG version which utilizes a configuration database
structure of a previous release. That is, a baseline version.
3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware
To manage the firmware versions, use the Supported Versions page. The Supported Version
page allows you to customize the list of expected versions only by doing the following:
To add expected versions only. Each added version is based on a baseline version. To
add an expected version, first consult Harmonic Customer Support. Harmonic support
personal will inform you of the baseline version required for adding the expected version.
To delete expected versions only.
To de-activate a baseline version. Once you de-activate a base line version, you remove it
from the Expected Firmware Versions list in the Device Information section.
To add an expected version
NOTE: Add an expected version only after consulting with Harmonic Customer Support and obtaining
the required baseline version.
1. Click MCT button.
2. Click MCT Options.
3. In the Navigation pane, select Versions.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 34 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the Parameters You Want
The MCT Supported Firmware page appears:
4. Open the Type list and select the required NSG type.
The Supported Versions list is updated to display the supported baseline versions for the
selected NSG type. By default, all baseline versions are active. That is, all baseline
versions appear in Detailed Information, under Expected Firmware Version.
5. To add the required version, click Add.
A blank row appears.
6. Open the Baseline Version list and select the baseline version.
7. In Expected Version, type the required customized version in the following pattern:
xx.xx.xx.xxx
8. To allow the customized versions of the baseline version to appear in the Expected
Firmware Version, verify that Active is selected.
9. To apply changes and to close the page, click OK.
The added version appears in the Expected Firmware Version list. You can select it to allow
MCT to display the tabs that this version supports. Now you can synchronize MCT with
the NSG devices.
3.5 Finding the Parameters You Want
To find the attribute you need and to move along between the various MCT sections and tabs,
use the following buttons/features included in the Editor group:
Back
Forward
Find
To move between the tabs, use the Back and Forward buttons. See Table 3-2: Editor Group
Parameters on page 29.
3.5.1 Find Feature
The find feature allows you to quickly locate a parameter in the MCT tabs and in the selected
section of the MCT. Selected sections may be one of the following:
Navigation pane
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 35 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the Parameters You Want
Device Information section
Details section and any sub section of the Details section. The search applies to the
selected tab only.
To search MCT
Sub section of the Details section
1. Select the required section to search and find the parameter.
2. Click the Find button .
3. In Text to Find, enter the parameter you wish to find.
4. Click Next.
5. To browse through the found items, click Previous, or Next.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 36 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
3.6 Getting to Know the MCT Actions
The following MCT actions are organized in the Ribbon in the Actions group. All of these
actions affect the NSGs:
Actions in NSG 9000 filter
Launch Web Client
Download Firmware
Reset
Set Clock
Change Password - enabled for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only.
Convert to NSG 9000-6G - enabled for NSG 9000 only.
Convert to NSG 9000-40G - enabled for NSG 9000-6G only.
3.6.1 Launching NSG Web Client
In case you need to open the web client of an NSG, do the following:
1. Select the required NSG.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Launch Web Client.
3.6.2 Resetting NSGs
The main page of the device web client opens.
You can reset (power-cycled) the NSGs through the MCT. Resetting an NSG interrupts
services in the device.
1. Select the NSGs you want to reset.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Reset.
The Action Log dialog appears. In MCT, in Device Information section, the
next to the record of the device.
icon appears
3. Wait until in Action Log, Finish is enabled.
4. Click Finish.
The device is up and running and in MCT, in Device Information section, the icon
appears.
3.6.3 Setting the Internal NSG Clock
Actions in NSG 9000-6G filter
You can set the NSG's internal clock either individually or synchronize a number of NSG
internal clocks together using the MCT.
1. Select the NSGs you want to set their clock.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Set Clock.
3. In the message that appears, click Yes.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 37 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
4.
The Action Log dialog appears.
Wait until Finish is enabled.
5. Click Finish.
NOTE: To change a password, see 3.6.4 Changing NSG Password on page 38.
3.6.4 Changing NSG Password
NOTE: This option is available for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only.
You can change both the Monitor and the Configure password.
To Change the NSG password via the MCT
1. Select the NSG or NSG devices you want to change passwords for.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Change Password.
The following window appears:
3. To change the password for Monitor access level, select Change Monitor Password.
4. To change the password for Configure access level, select Change Configure Password.
5. Enter the New Monitor/Configure Password.
6. Confirm the New Password data.
7. Select OK. A message box appears: This action will cause the selected NSGs to change
their passwords. Do you want to continue?
8. Select Yes in the message box. The Action Log dialog appears.
9. Wait until the action is complete.
10. Click Finish.
3.6.5 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G
To convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G, do the following:
Get NSG 9000 configuration and save the configuration of the NSG 9000 device. Save
the NSG 9000 configuration under a unique file name.
Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG 9000-6G device
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 38 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
Convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G
Configure NSG 9000-6G unique parameters
Send configuration to device
MCT converts any NSG 9000 version to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 only! That is, MCT Details
section displays the configurable parameters of version 2.1 only. For MCT to display the
configurable parameters of a different version, select in Device Information > Expected Firmware
Version the required expected version. See 3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions on page 34.
3.6.5.1 Getting NSG 9000 Configuration
To save the current configuration of the NSG 9000 device, save it to the database. See
3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases on page 25.
Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies:
The NSG 9000 device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the scrambling
mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG 9000-6G supports PM scrambling
only.
The NSG 9000 device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the emulation
template to Normal prior to the conversion.
3.6.5.2 Installing Required Hardware
To convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G, replace/install the following hardware components:
Replace the NSG 9000 main board with the main board of NSG 9000-6G
Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-8R1G
module type.
For details and instructions, see NSG 9000-6G HW and Installation User Guide.
3.6.5.3 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G
During the conversion, the following takes place:
The device is removed from the NSG 9000 filter and appears in the NSG 9000-6G filter
with its IP address.
MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and it
retains the values configured for NSG 9000. The configurable parameters unique to NSG
9000-6G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as modules
with up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with default
values.
At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG 9000-
6G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs.
To convert
1. While in NSG 9000 filter, select the required device(s) to be converted.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG 9000-6G .
NOTE: The Convert to NSG 9000-6G button is enabled in the NSG 9000 filter only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 39 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
Once the conversion is complete, the NSG 9000 devices are removed from the NSG
9000 filter and appear under the NSG 9000-6G filter. The Convert icon appears next to
the converted devices.
Convert icon Conversion is to version
2.1
3. Continue by configuring the configurable NSG 9000-6G parameters.
3.6.5.4 NSG 9000-6G Unique Parameters
See Configuring NSG 9000-6G on page 133.
3.6.5.5 Sending Configuration to device
See 3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55.
Once you execute a action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed.
3.6.6 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G
NOTE: The following section refers to conversion from NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 to NSG 9000-40G
version 3.1.
To convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G, do the following:
Get NSG 9000-6G configuration and save the configuration of the NSG 9000-6G device.
Save the NSG 9000-6G configuration under a unique file name.
Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG 9000-40G device
Convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G
Send to device
Optional - Configure NSG 9000-40G unique parameters and send to device
3.6.6.1 Getting NSG 9000-6G Configuration
To save the current configuration of the NSG 9000-6G device, save it to the database. See
3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases on page 25.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 40 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies:
The NSG 9000-6G device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the
scrambling mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG 9000-40G supports PM
scrambling only.
The NSG 9000-6G device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the
emulation template to Normal prior to the conversion.
The NSG 9000-6G device is working in Annex B. If it is working in Annex A or C, change
it prior to conversion.
In NSG 9000-6G Module Redundancy is disabled. If not, disable Module Redundancy
prior to conversion.
In NSG 9000-6G the power lever per QAM is in the range of 44-52 dBmV.
In NSG 9000-6G the Hold Time in the NGOD tab should be 10 seconds and up.
The NSG 9000-6G device mode is set to Standalone.
In NSG 9000-6G, the frequency steps of adjacent channels should be a multiplication of
6MHz.
The NSG 9000-6G is working with one of the following QAM managers: VOD, NGOD, or
ISA.
3.6.6.2 Installing Required Hardware
To convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G, replace/install the following hardware
components:
Replace the NSG 9000-6G main board with the main board of NSG 9000-40G
Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-36R1G
module type.
Replace the NSG 9000-6G front panel - front panel of NSG 9000-40G should have the
Turbo icon.
Replace the NSG 9000-6G power supply - power supply units for NSG 9000-40G should
have a Harmonic part number with the suffix 02 or 03.
For details and instructions, see NSG 9000-6G HW and Installation User Guide.
3.6.6.3 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G
During the conversion, the following takes place:
The device is removed from the NSG 9000-6G filter and appears in the NSG 9000-40G
filter with its IP address.
MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and it
retains the values configured for NSG 9000-6G. The configurable parameters unique to
NSG 9000-40G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as
modules with up to 24 QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with
default values.
At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG 9000-
40G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs, speed to GbE ports and
more.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 41 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
To convert
1. While in NSG 9000-6G filter, select the required device(s) to be converted.
2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG 9000-40G .
NOTE: The Convert to NSG 9000-40G button is enabled in the NSG 9000-6G filter only.
Once the conversion is complete, the NSG 9000-6G devices are removed from the NSG
9000-6G filter and appear under the NSG 9000-40G filter. The Convert icon appears next
to the converted devices.
3. Send configuration to the device. See 3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55.
Once you execute an action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed.
4. Reboot the device.
5. Continue by configuring the configurable NSG 9000-40G parameters.
3.6.6.4 NSG 9000-40G Unique Parameters
See Configuring NSG 9000-40G on page 177.
3.6.7 Action Status Dialog
Convert icon Conversion is to version
3.1
When you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, or checks configuration against
the NSGs, the MCT indicates the following:
Action progress by means of the Working and Completed progress bars in the Action Log
dialog.
Action status by means of the Status and Info sections in the Action log dialog.
Status of the operation by means of a status icon that appears in the row heading.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 42 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions
3.6.7.1 Reading Action Log Dialog
The Action Log includes the following:
Action completed on some of the required
NSGs. Working shows that the action is
performed against additional required
NSGs
Title bar - indicates the procedure that is currently taking place.
Status - once the procedure is complete, the Status section displays details regarding the
execution of the procedure per each device. If the procedure fails details are displayed in
red.
Info... - click this button to view an .XML file sent by the device. This file includes error
indications when the action failed.
Working progress bar - displays that the action is taking place.
Complete progress bar - progresses to display the completion of the action relatively to
the number of required devices. In addition, a counter updates the number of NSGs on
which the action was executed and completed out of the total required NSGs.
3.6.7.2 Reading Action Status Icons
The following table lists the available action icons
When you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, the MCT indicates the status of
the operation by means of a status icon that appears in row heading. The following table lists
the available action icons:
Table 3-4: Action Status Icons
Title bar - type of
actions
Action status:
Green - successful
Red - failed
Info button to view
an .XML file sent by
the device
working progress bar
Complete progress
bar
Counter
Icon Explanation
The last executed action completed successfully
Action completed on all of the required
NSGs. Working shows that the action was
performed against all of the required
NSGs
The last executed action completed successfully, but some
discrepancies exist. Usually appears after executing the Compare with
Device action. See 3.8.1 Comparing Configurations on page 53.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 43 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
Table 3-4: Action Status Icons
Icon Explanation
The required action failed. For example, could not execute Get from
Device because device firmware is unsupported.
MCT and NSG are fully synchronized
MCT and NSG are not synchronized
When resetting the device. When reset is complete, and the device is
up and running, this icon changes to this icon.
Firmware installation should be finalized. Any action that affects the
device is not applied and Reset cancels the firmware installation.
The whole row is selected.
An attribute is selected
Indicates that the device was converted from NSG 9000 to NSG
9000-6G. Once you execute an action against the device, the icon is
removed.
The following picture shows a common action status
Not-synchronized, last action failed
Synchronized, last action succeeded
Not-synchronized, last action partially
succeeded
Not-synchronized, last action
succeeded
3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware
Via MCT, you may download the firmware of multiple NSG devices. The number of NSG
devices that may be upgraded simultaneously is unlimited. MCT supports the following
firmware download procedures:
Firmware download for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000. See 3.7.1 Downloading NSG
Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G on page 45.
Firmware download for NSG 9000-6G. See 3.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG
9000-6G on page 46.
Firmware download for NSG 9000-40G. See 3.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG
9000-40G on page 51.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 44 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
The firmware download options are organized in the Ribbon in the Firmware Installation
group:
Download Firmware - click to start the procedure and allocate the firmware file.
Finalize & Reboot - Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 & up only. Click to finalize the
download and to reboot the device with the new firmware. Click this button when Manual is
selected in the Firmware Installation dialog.
Abort Installation - Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 & up only. Click to abort the
installation.
3.7.1 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G
NOTE: To upgrade from NSG 9000 version 01.03.09 or 01.04.05.x to 01.05.00, use MCT 9.1 only.
To download the NSG Firmware
1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.
2. Synchronize MCT with the required devices by clicking Get From Device.
3. Save the database file.
4. For backup purposes, save database under another name by selecting MCT Button > Save
As.
5. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG
supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG
Firmware on page 34.
The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 45 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
6. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.
7.
A confirmation message appears.
Click Yes.
8. In the dialog that appears, browse to the firmware file.
9. Click Open.
The Action Log dialog appears. The device will reboot with the new firmware. Once the
download is complete for all NSGs, the Finish button is enabled.
10. Click Finish.
11. Configure the devices via MCT. See Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 &
Below) on page 70 and Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up on page 110.
12. On the Home tab, in the Synchronize group, click Send to Device.
3.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-6G
To upgrade NSG 9000-6G, select either of the following methods:
Supported version
and relevant tabs
Supported version
and relevant tabs
Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade. See 3.7.2.2 Downloading using Installer on
page 47
Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade. See 3.7.3.3 Upgrading NSG9000-40G
Firmware Using an External Server on page 51.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 46 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
3.7.2.1 Upgrading Limitations
Upgrading a firmware depends on the Main Board Storage Format. The following table lists
the upgrading firmware limitations due to the supported storage format:
Table 3-5: Upgrading Limitations
Main Board Storage
Format
Single partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.0
NSG9K6G ver 2.2 or higher
3.7.2.2 Downloading using Installer
The NSG 9000-6G firmware is packaged and delivered within the installer application. The
installer turns firmware upgrade into an easy and straightforward procedure. To upgrade
using the NSG installer refer to the following instructions.
NSG installer includes the new firmware package. The name of the NSG installer indicates
the device type and the firmware version. For example: NSG9K6G-2.6.4.3-1-Installerv1.1.5.exe,
where:
NOTE: Firmware upgrade is service affecting.
To download NSG firmware for NSG 9000-6G devices using Installer
NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing
MCT Database on page 24.
1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.
2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG
supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG
Firmware on page 34.
The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.
3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.
A confirmation message appears.
4. Click Yes.
Supported by Versions Upgrade/downgrade limitations
Cannot run NSG9K6G ver. 2.1
Dual partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.1 or higher Cannot run with NSG9K6G ver. 2.0
NSG9K6G device type
2.6.4.3-1 firmware version
Installer application name
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 47 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
The following dialog appears:
5. Open the Upgrade Type list and select Standalone NSG Installer.
The following dialog appears:
6. To locate the upgrade firmware file, click Browse.
Installer file
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 48 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
7. Click Open.
8. Click Install.
The Action log dialog appears.
Once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the
firmware installation process is complete.
3.7.2.3 Downloading Firmware of NSG9000-6G using an External server
Firmware upgrade of NSG 9000-6G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP
server on the LAN. To download, you need the following:
Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server:
Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package
Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP
Professional and Windows 2000
The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K6G directory
The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network
The firmware installation procedure of NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and up allows to continue
working with the device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In
addition, you can monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog.
The following download procedure applies for both NSG 9000-6G version 2.0 and version
2.1 & up unless else is indicated.
To download NSG firmware for NSG 9000-6G devices
NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing
MCT Database on page 24.
1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.
2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG
supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG
Firmware on page 34.
The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.
3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.
A confirmation message appears.
4. Click Yes.
Installer file
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 49 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
The following dialog appears:
5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears.
6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions.
7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version.
8. For NSG 9000-6G 2.1 & up only
Open the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following:
Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware
Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience.
NOTE: Manual is available for NSG 9000-6G dual partition only. For single partition, select Automatic.
To check partition type, select the Platform tab, Partition Type.
9. Click Install.
The Action log dialog appears.
NOTE: In MCT 9.6 a pre-upgrade script is executed. If the script fails, record the error number and call
Harmonic Customer Support.
10. For NSG 9000-6G 2.0 only
Wait until Finish is enabled in the Action Log dialog. Once Finish is enabled, the process is
complete and the device is running with the newly installed firmware.
For NSG 9000-6G 2.1 & up only
Continue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and
clicking Info in the Action Log dialog.
If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device
is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is
complete.
If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for
Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following
applies:
The device is running with the previous installed version
Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied.
If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start
the installation.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 50 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
11. For NSG 9000-6G dual partition only
If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the
firmware download.
NOTE: Download is complete only after reboot.
3.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-40G
To upgrade NSG 9000-6G, select either of the following methods:
Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade
Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade
3.7.3.1 Upgrading Limitations
Upgrading NSG 9000-40G version 3.0 to version 3.1 is prohibited.
Downgrading NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 to version 3.0 is prohibited.
NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing
MCT Database on page 24.
3.7.3.2 Upgrading NSG9000-40G Firmware With Installer
To download NSG firmware for NSG9000-40G using installer, see page 47.
3.7.3.3 Upgrading NSG9000-40G Firmware Using an External Server
Firmware upgrade of NSG 9000-40G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP
server on the LAN. To download, you need the following:
Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server:
Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package
Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP
Professional and Windows 2000
The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K40G directory
The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network
The firmware installation procedure of NSG 9000-40G allows to continue working with the
device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In addition, you can
monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog.
1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.
2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG
supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG
Firmware on page 34.
The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.
3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.
A confirmation message appears.
4. Click Yes.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 51 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware
The following dialog appears:
5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears.
6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions.
7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version.
8. Open the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following:
Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware
Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience.
9. Click Install.
The Action log dialog appears.
10. Continue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and
clicking Info in the Action Log dialog.
If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device
is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is
complete.
If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for
Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following
applies:
The device is running with the previous installed version
Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied.
If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start
the installation.
11. If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the
firmware download.
3.7.3.4 Aborting the Installation
If you wish to cancel the firmware installation, click Abort Installation.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 52 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization
3.8 MCT and NSGs Synchronization
An NSG is out of sync when the configuration data stored in it is different from the
configuration data stored in the corresponding MCT database. If such a discrepancy occurs,
you can use MCT tools to synchronize the two. In general, such situation should be avoided
but may occur in a number of specific cases such as:
Uncontrolled changes to MCT configuration data.
If a new MCT database is setup for an NSG site that was already configured by other
means.
To check the synchronization status, you can run a comparison between the MCT database
and the NSGs. In this case MCT only reads the discrepancies that may exist.
NOTE: MCT may approach up to 20 NSG devices at the same time. If you cancel a synchronization
procedure, cancellation applies to the following batch of 20 devices. To verify the exact devices that
synchronization was applied to, check the log.
3.8.1 Comparing Configurations
This features allows to compare between the device configuration on MCT and on the NSG
itself.
1. Select the NSGs to validate.
2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Compare with Device.
The Action Log dialog appears.
In this case, MCT reads the configuration details of the selected NSGs, one by one.
Comments regarding the completion of the action per device, appear in the Action Log.
3. Wait until Finish is enabled.
4. Click Finish.
In MCT, in Device Information next to the selected NSGs the following icons appear:
If the configuration details are synchronized the icon appears next to the device
record.
If discrepancies exist, the icon appears next to the device record. See following
section.
3.8.1.1 Reading Compare with Device Details
If following Compare with Device, discrepancies exist, you may view Compare with Device
details.
To read compare with device details
1. Double click the icon.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 53 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization
The Comparison Results for page appears.
Available tabs. Tabs
in red are tabs with
discrepancies
2. View the results with the following guidelines:
Table 3-6: Comparison Results
Attributes with
discrepancies
3.8.2 Synchronizing Configurations
Item Explanation Comment
Navigation pane - Red text Tabs with attributes with
discrepancies
To synchronize the two, you need to get the current configuration data from the NSGs into the
MCT database.
To synchronize by importing the NSG configuration
1. Select NSGs to synchronize.
2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Get From Device.
3.
The Action Log dialog appears.
Wait until Finish is enabled.
4. Click Finish.
When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs.
Click to view this attribute
only
RowID Number of record Relevant when there is
more than one instance
Filed The attribute with
discrepancies
Blue column MCT value
Green column NSG value
MCT value NSG value
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 54 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information
When Get from Target is finished and the device is
3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs
NSG Configuration
in MCT
Type: 8108/9116
Ver: PM
Type: 8108/9116
Ver: Non PM
Type: any
Ver: PM/Non PM
Type: X
Ver: Supported
Type: X
Ver: Supported
Type: any
Ver: Supported
1. Select the required device(s).
If Site node is selected, MCT sends NSG configuration to NSG devices of the selected
site. If Device nodes are selected, MCT sends configuration to all selected NSGs.
2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Send to Device.
3.
The Action Log dialog appears.
Wait until Finish is enabled.
4. Click Finish.
When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs.
The following table lists limitations of Get from Device and Send to Device options:
Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations
Actual NSG Configuration Get From Device Send to Device
Type: 8108/9116
Ver: Non PM
Type: 8108/9116
Ver: PM
Type: any but other than
MCT
Type: X
Ver: supported version
different than MCT
Type: Y (different than X)
Ver: supported version
different than MCT
Type: any
Ver: Un supported
3.9 Exporting Information
Supported, MCT changes
encryption mode as per
device
Supported, MCT changes
encryption mode as per
device.
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
messages
Supported, MCT changes
GUI as per device version
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
messages
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error message
You can export device configuration to the following:
NMX, see 3.9.1 Exporting to NMX on page 56.
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
message. Change unit
type.
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
message. Change unit
type.
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
messages
Not Supported,
MCT displays an error
message.
Not Supported,
MCT displays an error
message.
Not Supported, MCT
displays an error
message
SDV Session Manager of BigBand, see 3.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of
BigBand on page 57.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 55 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information
SDV Session Manager of Cisco, see 3.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco on
page 57.
You can also export the device up time, see
3.9.1 Exporting to NMX
Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to NMX,
and use NMX for monitoring the alarms status and reporting on QAM utilization. MCT exports
the data into a template file that NMX can import as a new NMX map. The file name is as
follows: .tpt. The file is saved in the same location as the MCT database.
Each .tpt file includes the selected NSGs with the same NMX Network
Group. For each group of NSGs with the same NMX Network Group, NMX creates a unique
map. To define NMX Network Group, 2.1.9 Device Information Section on page 19.
To export NSGs configuration to NMX
1. Verify that the MCT database you wish to export is open.
2. Click MCT button.
3. Select Export > Export to NMX template.
The MCT to NMX dialog box appears:
4. By default you may export all network groups. If no, select Single Network Group and select
the network group for exporting.
5. Click Export.
6. Once the procedure is complete and the (database name).tpt file is created, a message
appears notifying you that the procedure is complete.
NOTE: When you export a network group, each network group has its own .tpt file.
7. In NMX, in Network View tab, right click a site and select Create Network Group from
Template.
The Create Network Group from Template dialog opens.
8. In Advanced, select Use Original Values.
9. Select Use Local Template File and navigate to the required .tpt file and open it.
10. In Object Information, in Name enter the required Network Group name.
11. Click Ok.
NMX creates a Network group with all the NSG devices included in the imported
template.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 56 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information
3.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand
Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV
Session manager of BigBand (SBSS). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that SBSS
can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is
also created for each virtual device.
To export NSGs configuration to SBSS
1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.
2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the SBSS file.
3. Click MCT button.
4. Select Export > Export to SBSS.
The Export to SBSS dialog box appears:
5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that
complies with SBSS.
6. In Settings, do the following:
Number of Session per Channel - the default is 16. Enter the required number of shell
sessions per channel
RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following:
Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeQAM configuration
Disabled - RF ports should be disabled
Enabled - RF ports should be enabled
Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from 1 - 255.
You can indicate a range as required.
Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in
the file
7. Click Export.
For each selected device, an XML file that complies with SBSS specifications is created at
the indicated location.
3.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco
Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV
Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM
can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is
also created for each virtual device.
To export NSGs configuration to USRM
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 57 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information
1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.
2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file.
3. Click MCT button.
4. Select Export > Export to USRM.
The Export to USRM dialog box appears:
5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that
complies with USRM.
6. In Settings, do the following:
RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following:
Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeQAM configuration
Disabled - RF ports should be disabled
Enabled - RF ports should be enabled
Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from 1 - 255.
You can indicate a range as required.
Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in
the file
7. Click Export.
For each selected device, an XML file that complies with USRM specifications is created
at the indicated location.
Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV
Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM
can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is
also created for each virtual device.
To export NSGs configuration to USRM
1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.
2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file.
3. Click MCT button.
4. Select Export > Export to USRM.
3.9.4 Exporting Device Uptime
You can export the device uptime to a .CSV Excel file. Device uptime indicates the time the
device is up and running since the last reboot. The exported information includes the
following parameters:
NSG ETH1 IP
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 58 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics RF Module Redundancy
NSG Name
NSG SW version
NSG Uptime (Years:Days:Hours:Minutes)
To export NSGs uptime
1. Select the devices that you wish to export their uptime.
2. Click MCT button.
3. Select Export > Export Uptime Data to CSV Excel file.
The Action dialog opens.
4. Click on Information to view the location of the CSV file The default path is:
C\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\Data\DB\Uptime Export.
5. To view the CSV file, navigate to it according to the indicated path and double click the
CSV file.
3.10 RF Module Redundancy
Action dialog
Click Information
View information
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 59 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs
See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on page 141.
3.11 Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs
Distributing Alarms Settings allows to send the alarm settings of a selected NSG device to other
NSG devices.
To distribute alarm settings
1. Do either of the following:
To distribute settings to devices of a specific site only, in the Navigation pane, select the
required site.
To distribute settings to devices of other sites, in the Navigation pane, select the root node
of the sites tree.
2. In Device Information, select the device whose alarm settings you want to distribute to
other devices in your system.
The Alarm Settings button is enabled.
3. On the Home tab, in Distribute Files group, click Alarms Settings.
The Distribute Alarms Settings dialog appears. It is populated with NSG devices according
to your selecting in the Navigation pane:
Site 1 is selected and the Distribute
Alarms dialog is populated with Site 1
devices only.
4. In the Distribute Alarms dialog, either click Select All to select all populated devices or
select the required devices.
5. Click Alarms Settings.
The Action Log dialog appears
6. Wait until Finish is enabled.
3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File
MCT tree is selected and the Distribute
Alarms dialog is populated with the
devices of the MCT tree.
By default the Emulation Template is set to Normal. However, the following QAM mapping
options are available:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 60 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File
NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different
mapping of the QAMs. To set the required emulation mode, for NSG 9000 version 1.5
and below, see Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below on
page 84 and for NSG 9000 version 1.5.1 and up, see Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG
9000 1.5.x & Up on page 117.
NSG 9000-6G device may emulate the operation of other NSG 9000 3GbE devices
which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG 9000 3GbE,
NSG 9000-6G routes the UDP range to a QAM. For example UDP 0x501 is routed to
QAM=1.2.1, Service ID=1.
NSG 9000-40G device may emulate the operation of other NSG 9000 6GbE devices
which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating, NSG 9000-40G routes
the UDP range to a QAM. Routing is according to the following two methods:
Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the 10MSB indicate the designated
QAM-RF output and the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are:
QAM-RF 0-1023, Service ID 0-63.
Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM mapping the 8MSB indicate the
designated QAM-RF output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed
ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID 0-63.
There are two types of UDP mapping files:
XML file - for NSG 9000-6G and NSG 9000. Each Emulation Mode is defined by an XML
file. Once you select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode
XML file.
You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to an XML file and
when required you can import them to the device.
CSV file - for NSG 9000-40G. Each Emulation Mode is defined by a CSV file. Once you
select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode file.
You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to a CSV file and
when required you can import them to the device. You cannot edit the UDP mapping
CSV file via MCT.
To define custom QAM mapping file
1. Click MCT button.
2. Click MCT Options.
3. In the Navigation pane, select Custom UDP Mapping.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 61 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File
The following screen appears:
4. Applies to XML file only. To edit the XML file, click Edit.
5.
The Save Changes and Cancel Changes buttons are enabled.
Edit the XML file to create the required custom mapping document.
6. Click any of the following buttons to obtain any of the listed operations:
Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page
Button Explanation
Import L File Allows to import the file. See 3.12.1 Importing Customized
QAM Mapping Mode File on page 63.
Export File Allows to export custom QAM Mapping modes. See
3.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File on
page 63.
View File Allows to view the file, XML - in a browser page, CSV - as
an Excel document.
Reset File Allows to return to the default values.
Edit Applies to XML file only. Allows to enter changes in the
XML file.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 62 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information
Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page
Button Explanation
Save Changes Applies to XML file only. Allows to save the changes to
the XML file
Cancel Changes Applies to XML file only. Allows to remove all changes
3.12.1 Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File
1. In Custom Mapping page, click Import File.
2. Browse to the required file and click Open.
The imported file appears in the pane.
3. You may apply any of the following actions listed in Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP
Mapping page on page 62.
3.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File
1. In Custom Mapping page, click Export XML File.
2. Browse to the required location.
3. Click Save.
3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information
MCT can retrieve and display licensing records spread across different NSGs at different sites.
To retrieve licensing information, MCT accesses the records of Harmonic’s database and
withdraws the information. To query the database, MCT uses the following parameters,
depending of the License Manager you are using:
When using License Manger (LM) 2.x:
License pack ID - a number you received when purchasing a license. This number is used
for customer authentication. The license pack ID is also called Right ID (RID).
MB serial number - since licenses bound to the specific main board on which they were
installed, the serial number of the device is used for retrieving licensing information.
NOTE: Licensing is supported for the following versions:
NSG 9000 - all version except version 1.3.9.
NSG 9000-6G - all versions.
When using License Manager 3.x and up:
User Name - License Manager username
Password - License Manager password
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 63 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information
3.13.1 Understanding the Licensing Tab
The Licensing tab allows to query Harmonic’s database for licensing information and to view
the retrieved information.
Queries Legacy
Authentication,
LM 2.x
The retrieved information is arranged in the Details section in the following tabs:
Table 3-9: Licensing Related Tabs
Tab Explanation
Platform Includes general information about the device that is used during the
query for licensing information.
License
Summary
The following section instructs you on how to retrieve the licensing information using MCT.
To query for licensing information
1. Select the Licensing tab.
Provides a summary of all the purchased licenses per device. See
Table 3-10: License Summary Tab on page 66.
License Details Displays the license packs installed on the device with license type
and license serial number. See Table 3-11: License Details Tab on
page 67.
License Packs Displays the number of bound licenses per each license pack and
license type. See Table 3-12: License Packs Tab on page 68.
QAM&TS Shows the actual active licenses per QAM.
Queries New
Authentication, LM
3.x
Device Information
section
Details section
with Licensing
related tabs
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 64 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information
Licensing tab is
selected
Click to execute a
query
Legacy - enter license pack ID
and execute a query
Legacy - enter username and
password and execute a query
2. In Device Information, select the devices you wish to query for licensing information.
Get License Pack is enabled.
3. For LM version 2.x, do the following:
1. Focus on the Legacy Authentication section.
2. In the Seed License Pack box, enter a license pack ID to authenticate your customer
information. When purchasing licenses, you received a license pack ID.
3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query.
4. In the message that appears, click Yes.
License related tabs that are populated
with information following a query
Select devices for querying their
licenses
Enter a license pack ID to
allow the query
Click to execute a query
A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section
are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs
associated with the selected devices.
5.
Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters.
For LM version 3.x and up, do the following:
1. Focus on the New Authentication section.
2. In User Name, enter your LM username.
Enter your LM username
Enter your LM username
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 65 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information
3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query.
4. In the message that appears, click Yes.
3.13.1.1 License Summary Tab
A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section
are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs
associated with the selected devices.
Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters.
The License Summary tab shows the total number of installed and used licenses per device
as the following table explains:
Table 3-10: License Summary Tab
Parameter Explanation
MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with.
Site Name The site the device is associated with.
Device Name The name of the device.
NSG IP The management IP of the device.
MB Serial Number The serial number of the mother board. Since licenses are
bound to the specific main board on which they were
installed, licensing queries use this parameter together
with the entered license pack to identify the device.
Installed Temp Licenses The number of temporary license - all of the QAM-RF
channels are operating. This license is time limited. It can
be limited as follows:
14 days - default license. See Default QAM Licenses.
90 day - usually for trial or demo purposes
30 day - usually for trial or demo purposes
Default QAM Licenses Default licenses - 14 days license. Once you purchase the
device and as soon as the device starts working it works
for 14 days with all of its capabilities. This grace period of
14 days allows you to activate your licenses to guarantee
device operation according to its licensed functions.
Installed QAM Licenses Number of installed QAM licenses.
Total Available QAM
Licenses
The total amount of available QAM licenses. This number
includes the installed and default licenses.
Installed MOTPM Licenses Number of installed Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM)
licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled
in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola.
Installed DOCDTI Licenses Number of installed DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This
license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI
synchronization via
the licensed QAM.
Installed DOC Licenses Number of installed DOCSIS (DOC) licenses. This license
type allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 66 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information
Table 3-10: License Summary Tab
3.13.1.2 License Details Tab
Parameter Explanation
Installed NSCR Licenses Number of installed NSCR licenses. This license type
allows to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVB
scrambling.
Used Temp Licenses Number of active temporary licenses.
Used QAM Licenses Number of active QAM licenses.
Used MOTPM Licenses Number of used Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM)
licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled
in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola.
Used DOC Licenses Number of active DOCSIS licenses. This license type
allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM.
Used DOCDTI Licenses Number of active DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This
license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI
synchronization via
the licensed QAM.
Used NSCR Licenses Number of active NSCR licenses. This license type allows
to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVB
scrambling.
The License Details tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack,
license type and license serial number:
Table 3-11: License Details Tab
Parameter Explanation
MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with.
Site Name The site the device is associated with.
Device Name The name of the device.
NSG IP The management IP of the device.
License Pack License pack number.
N/A - appears for default licenses.
License Type The type of the license:
Single QAM License
MOT PM per QAM
License Serial Number A unique number to identify the license. If during the
query, MCT does not find a license pack associated with a
license serial number, a message appears at the end of
the query.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 67 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab
3.13.1.3 License Packs Tab
The License Packs tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack,
license type and the number of installed and bound licenses:
NOTE: Only installed licenses have a license pack ID. Temporary and default licenses are not displayed
because they do not have a license Pack ID.
Table 3-12: License Packs Tab
3.14 Authentication Tab
Parameter Explanation
MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with
Site Name The site the device is associated with
Device Name The name of the device
NSG IP The management IP of the device
License Pack License pack number.
N/A - appears for default licenses.
License Type The type of the license:
Single QAM License
MOT PM per QAM
Qty Bound The number of installed and bound licenses. To view the
number of active licenses, select the QAM&TS tab.
In case of a mismatch between the number of active
licenses and bound licenses, a message appears.
The Authentication tab is available for NSG 9000-6G devices only. It allows you to enter a
username and password for authentication against a RADIUS server. In case you have more
than one RADIUS server in your network, or username and password for various groups of
NSG devices, use the Authentication tab available for each NSG 9000-6G device.
Once you enter a username and password via the Authentication tab, MCT saves these
parameters and uses them to access the devices. You need to enter these parameters
whenever you open MCT. MCT does not save the parameters to its database.
NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT
Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details
To use the Authentication tab
1. Verify that you are working in the NSG 9000-6G filter.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 68 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab
2. Select the Authentication tab.
3. Enter the required Username and Password.
MCT uses this combination to access the devices.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 69 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Overview
Chapter 4
Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below)
4.1 Overview
Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear
as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs
and their attributes according to the most recent available version. If you are using a previous
version, some of the documented tabs and/or attributes may not be applicable.
4.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters
Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start
configuring the device via MCT.
To set platform parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Platform tab.
3. Configure the platform parameters as explained below:
NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured.
Table 4-1: Platform Parameters
Parameter Explanation
ETH1 IP This address must be unique across the MCT database since it
is used for identifying the NSG device. The IP address of the
ETH1 port of the NSG. Should be on a different subnet than
ETH2.
MAC Address Read-only. The physical address of the NSG. The required
format is 12 digits, hexadecimal with no separator characters.
ETH1 IP Mask The subnet mask for the ETH1 port.
Gateway The IP address of the default gateway in your network (if one
exists).
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 70 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
Table 4-1: Platform Parameters
Parameter Explanation
ETH1 PHY
Configuration
4.3 Configuring Input Ports
4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 on page 71
4.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 on page 75
4.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & Below on page 77
4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108
This configuration includes the following:
Defining the GbE input port and its channels
Defining the ASI input ports
4.3.1.1 Configuring GbE Input Ports in NSG 8108
The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may
select either of the following options:
Auto Neg - a handshake protocol used in Ethernet links. It
must be selected if the other end of the Ethernet link also
uses auto Negotiation. Selecting this protocol while
communicating with a device that does not use it, causes
communication problems.
100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication
mode to full duplex.
10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication
mode to full duplex.
100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication
mode to half duplex.
10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication
mode to half duplex.
ETH2 Enable Check to enable the ETH2 port (NSG 8108 and NSG 9000
version 1.5 and below)
ETH2 IP The IP address of the ETH2 port of the NSG, which is used for
conditional access.
ETH2 IP Mask The subnet mask for the ETH2 port.
ETH2 PHY
Configuration
The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may
select either of the options described in ETH1 PHY
Configuration section.
Serial Number Read only. The serial number of the chassis.
Boot Version Read only. The BOOT version currently installed.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 71 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 4-2: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.
Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the
port does not admit input even if the other parameters are
configured properly.
IP Address The IP address of the port.
IP Mask The IP mask of the port.
IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.
Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the
gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately
once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.
Unidirectional Defines the communication type between the GbE port and
the switch. Select one of the following:
None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP
protocol.
UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active.
The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via
the management LAN. The switch returns its communication
via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration
field information.
UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is
active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the
switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its
communication via the GbE network.
UDAD Login Password The appropriate password that opens the communication
between the switch and NSG. The default password is cisco.
UDAD Administrator
Password
The password for entering the switch configuration. The
default password is cisco.
Force Management IP If checked, the NSG will use specified switch management IP
rather than looking for that address in the packet received
from the switch.
Switch Management IP The IP address that the NSG uses to communicate with the
GbE switch.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 72 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
Table 4-2: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
Redundancy Mode Select one of the following:
Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only
their GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This
will eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active
channel.
Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In
case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch
to the backup channel.
Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the
NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to
ensure continuity of service.
Active Port Relevant in case of a GbE port with two channels. If you select
Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port control is disabled
and NSG controls which channel is active.
4. To define the GbE channels, click the Channels tab.
5. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation:
Table 4-3: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel.
Channel No. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port.
Last in Chain This option applies for each GbE channel separately.
Check this option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain.
In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for
the last channel on the chain so it does not send traffic
back to the GbE switch.
Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is
not last in chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from
it will not be able to receive any data over their GbE ports.
Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto
Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake
protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other
end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto
Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared.
Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a
device that does not use it causes communication
problems.
4.3.1.2 Configuring the Input ASI Ports of NSG 8108
1. In Details, select the ASI Input tab.
2. In the ASI page, a row of information appears for each ASI port.
3. Configure the ports as explained below:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 73 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
Table 4-4: Parameters of ASI Ports of NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP (Read Only) The IP address of the NSG.
ASI In No. (Read Only) The number of the ASI input port.
Port Enable Select to enable the port.
4.3.1.3 ASI Input Port NSG 8108 - Configuring Switching Range
Use the Switching tab to direct programs from the input port through which they arrive to a
specific output TS. Programs are routed in ranges - each range representing a group of
programs that all arrive from the same input port and go to the same output TS.
Switching is irrelevant to GbE input ports. Programs arriving through GbE input ports have
their routing information embedded into them.
To configure the switching range
1. Select the Switching tab.
2. Configure the parameters according to the following explanation:
Table 4-5: Switching Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP (Read Only) Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Range No (Read Only) Assigned automatically.
Input Enter the required input port.
From Program Enter the first program ID of the program range.
To Program Enter the last program ID of the program range.
Output 1-8 Check the box that corresponds to the transport stream over
which you want to output the indicated range of programs. One
input range can leave the NSG on one transport stream only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 74 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
4.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116
Two rows appear for each NSG 9116. Configure the relevant fields for each GbE port. The
following fields and their explanation refer to both Cascading and Switching mode unless else
is indicated.
1. In Details, select the GbE tab.
2. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:
Table 4-6: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.
Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both
ports are active.
Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port
does not admit input even if the other parameters are
configured properly.
Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both
ports.
IP Address The IP address of the port.
IP Mask The IP mask of the port.
IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.
Second IP Address Relevant to NSG 9116 in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme.
The second IP address of the port is required for the service
routing information and belongs to the same subnet as the first
IP address. If a service is output via QAM 9 -16, associate the
UDP port with the second IP Address to indicate QAM 9 - 16.
For example, if you assign the port IP address 10.30.11.133
and 2nd IP address 10.30.11 132, the UDP together with the
IP address 10.30.11.133 directs the TS to QAM 1- 8. If you
indicate the UDP with the 2nd IP address, the TS is output via
QAM 9 - 16.
Route Refresh Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends
"Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are
sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing
expiration of the route.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 75 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
Table 4-6: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
Unidirectional Defines the communication type between the GbE port and
the switch. Select one of the following:
None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP
protocol.
UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active.
The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via
the management LAN. The switch returns its communication
via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration field
information.
UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is
active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the
switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its
communication via the GbE network.
UDAD Login
Password
UDAD Administrator
Password
Force Management
IP
Switch Management
IP
Cascading mode only. The appropriate password that opens
the communication between the switch and NSG. The default
password is cisco.
Cascading mode only. The password for entering the switch
configuration. The default password is cisco.
Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG will use specified
switch management IP rather than looking for that address in
the packet received from the switch.
Cascading mode only. The IP address that the NSG uses to
communicate with the GbE switch.
Redundancy Mode Cascading mode only. Select one of the following:
Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only their
GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This will
eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active
channel.
Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In
case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch
to the backup channel.
Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the
NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to ensure
continuity of service.
Active Port Cascading mode only. Relevant in case of a GbE port with two
channels. If you select Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port
control is disabled and NSG controls which channel is active.
3. To define the channels of the GbE port, select the Channels tab.
4. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 76 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports
Table 4-7: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel.
Channel No. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port.
Last in Chain This option applies for each GbE channel separately. Check this
option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain.
In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for the last
channel on the chain so it does not send traffic back to the GbE
switch.
Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is not last in
chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from it will not be able
to receive any data over their GbE ports.
Switching mode - By default, last in chain is selected.
Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto
Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol
used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link
(typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the
box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while
communicating with a device that does not use it causes
communication problems
4.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
The NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports.
To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE tab.
3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:
Table 4-8: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.
Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are
active.
Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does
not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.
Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.
IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 77 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-8: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
IP Mask The IP mask of the port.
IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.
IP Address 2 The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
IP Address 3 The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
Route Refresh Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping"
requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent
approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of
the route.
Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation
is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE
links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a
GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be
cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a
device that does not use it causes communication problems.
NGOD Input
Group Name
4.4 Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
The Operation Mode allows you flexibility and optimal device utilization. It allows you to set
general parameters to the output stream.
To define operation mode parameters
Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.
Active Port Select either of the following:
SFP - for an optical fiber
RJ45 - for a copper cable
Enable
Forwarding
Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this
GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in
Destination Port.
Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that
accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions,
see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab.
3. Define the required parameters as explained below:
NSG 8108 - Table 4-9, “Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108,” on page 79
NSG 9116 - Table 4-10, “Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116,” on page 80
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 78 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
NSG 9000 - Table 4-14, “Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below,” on
page 84
Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method
Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European
and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per
QAM-RF channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly
in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but
utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or
the Random options to govern the method elementary
streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option
will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, “4.4.1 PID
Remapping Options on page 85.
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected.
This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in
hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is
0x21 to 0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected.
This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in
hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is
0x21 to 0x1FF0.
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.
The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must
be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or
down to the closest divisible decimal value.
Preclude Broadcast To block management port. The port does not receive
broadcast in port level.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 79 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108
Parameter Explanation
Motorola Pre-encryption
Only for Privacy Mode
If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it
was pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment.
All encryption-related information is passed as is to the
NSG's output. This handling should not damage nonencrypted
content, so you can leave this box checked
without ramifications.
Max. Stream per TS The maximum number of elementary streams per
transport streams. service per output.
Block TS Oversubscription When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that
surpass the Max. Stream per TS you define.
Max Utilization The maximum number of transport streams possible.
UDP Port Scheme The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte
number) carries the service routing information See
4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme on page 86.
CAS Enable Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully
enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device.
Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is
DVB Scrambling. See also Table 3-7, “Get and Send
Limitations,” on page 55.
NTP Enabled Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal
Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP
(Network Time Protocol) server. If you enable this option,
you cannot set the time of the unit manually.
NTP IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server
Local Time Offset Select the required local time offset to match between the
time of the device, or UTC time and the Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Disable GbE Alarm - MPEG
Sync Loss
Disable GbE Alarm - No
Valid MPEG Stream Input
Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116
You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no
valid MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic.
You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the
data received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG
stream. Typically, the GbE stream does not contain a PAT.
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard encryption method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s encryption method
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 80 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
Scrambling Mode Select either of the following scrambling methods:
DES
DVB
GbE Mode You may choose either the Cascading or the Switching option
to govern the traffic between chained NSG 9116 units.
Note: changing the GbE Mode applies after sending
configuration to device and device reboot.
Cascading - an advanced cabling scheme that chains any
number of NSGs together. Each NSG device draws the
services intended for it and passes on the traffic so a total
one Gigabit is used.
Switching - an advanced cabling scheme that chains two
NSG 9116 units to a third NSG 9116 unit. Each of the two
units receives another GbE input stream and draws the
services intended for it. Each unit passes on the traffic to a
different GbE port of the third NSG 9116 unit so a total of
one GbE is used.
Note: If Switching is selected, Multicast is disabled. See
Table 4-13 on page 84.
QAM Mapping Mode Arranges the QAM channels in relation to RF ports in either of
the following options:
Normal - For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-11 on
page 83.
8108 - For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-12 on
page 83.
Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and
Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in
Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes
bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
CAS Enabled Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully
enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device.
Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is DVB
Scrambling. See also Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations on
page 55.
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the
Random options to govern the method elementary streams are
remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect
only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping
Options on page 85.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 81 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected.
This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected.
This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The
allowed range is
66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if
not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible
decimal value.
Motorola Preencryption
Parameter Explanation
If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it was
pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment. All
encryption-related information is passed as is to the NSG's
output. This handling should not damage non-encrypted
content, so you can leave this box checked without
ramifications.
Max. Stream per TS The maximum number of elementary streams per transport
streams.
Block TS
Oversubscription
When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that surpass
the Max. Stream per TS you define.
Max Utilization Limit The maximum number of transport streams possible.
UDP Port Scheme The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte
number) carries the service routing information. See
“4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme on page 86.
NTP Enabled Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal Time
Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP (Network Time
Protocol) server. If you enable this option,
you cannot set the time of the unit manually.
NTP IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server
Local Time Offset Select the required local time offset to match between the time
of the device, that is UTC time and the Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT).
Create SAT When enabled an SDT (Service Description Table) is added to
the output stream and the Serv. Area parameter (included in
the TS page) is sent to the NSG.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 82 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116
Disable GbE Alarm -
MPEG Sync Loss
Disable GbE Alarm -
No Valid MPEG Stream
Input
Table 4-11: Normal - QAM Channel Mapping
RF Port
Parameter Explanation
1 1,2
2 3,4
3 5,6
4 7,8
5 9,10
6 11,12
7 13,14
8 15,16
QAM
Channel
Table 4-12: 8108 -QAM Channel Mapping
RF Port QAM Channel
1 1,5
2 2,6
3 3,7
4 4,8
5 1,5
6 2,6
7 3,7
8 4,8
You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no valid
MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic.
You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the data
received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG stream.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 83 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-13: GbE Mode & UDP Port Scheme
GbE Mode & Scheme TS GbE IP Address QAM Output
Switching 1-8 different input
9-16 different input
Cascading & Bitmap 1-8 same input
9-16 same input
First
Second
First
second
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 84 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
Cascading & Encoded 1-16 Enabled port 1-16
Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
QAM Mapping
Mode
By default the QAM Mapping Mode is set to Normal. In this
case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel.
However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of
other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs.
For detailed information on the QAM Mapping, see the NSG
9000 Software User’s Guide.
Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and
Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in
Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes
bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the
Random options to govern the method elementary streams are
remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect
only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping
Options on page 85.
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit
of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The
range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit
of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The
range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters
Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The
allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be
divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the
closest divisible decimal value.
DTI Card Exist When selected indicates whether a DTI card is installed in the
device. This is a read-only parameter.
Use DTI Clock Check to use the DTI clock. You can select the Use DTI clock
parameter only if there is a DTI card, that is, DTI CARD Exist
parameter is checked.
NTP Enabled Select this box to synchronize device time with UTC.
NTP IP Address Enter the NTP IP address.
Local Time Offset To set the local time according to the Universal Time
Coordination (UTC), select the required time offset.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method
Application Mode Select either of the following application modes:
VOD\SDV - the default option. The NSG 9000 device is
operating as an integral part of a Video On Demand or
Switched Digital Video network and the required
parameters for this application are enabled.
M-CMTS - The NSG 9000 device is operating as an integral
part of an M-CMTS application and its QAMs serve for both
VOD narrowcast and DOCSIS.
Symbol Rate 1 The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per
second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the
required rate for this option.
Symbol Rate 2 The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per
second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the
required rate for this option.
Interleaver 1 An advanced QAM configuration parameter. For Annex-A or
Annex-C, use 12-17. For Annex-B, Interleaver value depends on
the constellation in use. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver
values, set the required value for this interleaver.
Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.
Force IGMPv2 Defines the GbE management protocol to IGMPv2 only. NSG
9000 ignores IGMPv3 messages and does not generate
IGMPv3 messages.
4.4.1 PID Remapping Options
Select either of the following PID remapping options:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 85 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Paradigm - a set formula. The elementary streams are selected from a predefined hexadecimal
formula for PMT, Video 1&2, and ECM. For details, see below.
Random - instructs the NSG to remap incoming PIDs to PID numbers that are randomly
selected from a predefined range.
When choosing the paradigm option a service ID will be chosen from a predefined hexadecimal
formula and the ID of the PMT, Video, Audio 1&2 and ECM PIDs are derived from the
service ID as follows:
Table 4-15: Paradigm Option
NOTE: The Paradigm mode is not suitable for processing services with service IDs greater than 255. If
you are using service ID that are greater than 255 you must use the Random mode.
4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme
The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing
information. Select either of the following schemes:
Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the NSG. The Output TS is
determined by the bit that is set to 1. For example, TS 8 is represented by 10000000, TS
3 by 00000100 and TS 9 by 00000001 together with the 2nd IP address.
The 2nd IP address is relevant in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme. The second IP
address of the port required for the service routing information. If the service is output via
QAM 9-16, associate the UDP port with the second IP address to indicate QAM 9-16.
Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of the MSB. For example, TS
8 is represented by 00001000, TS 3 by 00000011 and TS 9 by 00001001.
4.5 Configuring Output Parameters
For detailed explanation, see:
Formula Example
Service ID = 0xN Service ID = 0x34
PMT PID = LeftShit (N)=0xNO PMT PID = 0x340
PCR=Video=PMT+1=0x N1 Video = 0x341
Audio 1&2 = PMT+ 4/5=0xN 4, 0xN5 Audio 1&2= 0x344, 0x345
ECM=PMT+9=0xN9 ECM PID=0x349
NSG 8108 Table 4-16, “NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters,” on page 87
NSG 9116 Table 4-17, “NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters,” on page 89
NSG 9000 Table 4-18, “NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below,” on page 91
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 86 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
4.5.1 Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and 9116
For each platform record, MCT creates up to eight (NSG 8108)/ sixteen (NSG 911xx)
transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The
streams are automatically numbered 1 through the number of TSs in the TS ID column.
Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of the NSG. You must first select a
channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.
To define the out TS parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the TS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.
Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
QAM Reference Number Each device has 4xRF ports. Each RF port facilitates
2xQAM channels. This field indicates an index number
of the QAM channels from 1-8.
RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows:
RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 5
RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 2, 6
RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 3, 7
RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 4, 8
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This
value is provided by the vendor and may help you
when exporting this database to NMX template. Once
you export this database to NMX template, you can
monitor the serving area and generate statistical
reports.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-
>65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation
Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB
standard.
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for
the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A
appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in
RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined
by the EIA.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 87 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters
Parameter Explanation
RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the
EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.
However, you can define a required frequency for the
RF carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq.
The entered frequency should be divisible by 100.
Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs
are actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM
Reference Number. When the RF Frequency of a TS is
set to F1, the frequency of its paired TS is automatically
set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth). For example, if you
use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you set the RF
Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then
the RF Frequency of TS number 5 will be set to
506,000,000 Hz.
RF Power Level (dbmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the
power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the
power level of its associated stream (for example,
stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You
can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as
well (for example, 50.5).
Constellation Valid values are:
Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,
QAM256
Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256
Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,
QAM256
Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF
signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of
delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network
infrastructure.
Data Rate (Bps) (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream. The
data rate value changes according to the value of
Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters.
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of
the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended
values are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1
ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1
Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled
QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open.
To close the IF output port of a specific transport
stream, clear the box.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 88 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters
RF On If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport
streams unless. Clear the box to close the outputs.
Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF
and Port Enable boxes are checked.
Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
QAM Reference
Number
Parameter Explanation
The number of QAM channels. Each device has 8xRF ports.
Each RF port facilitates 2xQAM channels. This field indicates an
index number of the QAM channels from 1-16.
RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows:
RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 2
RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 3, 4
RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 5, 6
RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 7, 8
RF port 5 outputs QAM reference number 9, 10
RF port 6 outputs QAM reference number 11, 12
RF port 7 outputs QAM reference number 13, 14
RF port 8 outputs QAM reference number 15, 16
GbE IP Indicates The GbE IP address facilitating the data that is output
via the QAMs related to this IP address.
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is
provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this
database to NMX template. Once you export this database to
NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate
statistical reports.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-
>65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of
the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as
defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates
that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with
the frequencies defined by the EIA.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 89 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters
Parameter Explanation
RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA
channel number configured in EIA Freq.
However, you can define a required frequency for the RF
carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The
entered frequency should be divisible by 100.
Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs are
actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM Reference Number.
When the RF Frequency of a TS is set to F1, the frequency of its
paired TS is automatically set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth).
For example, if you use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you
set the RF Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then
the RF Frequency of TS number 2 will be set to 506,000,000
Hz.
RF Power Level (dbmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level
of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its
associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically
updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a
decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).
Constellation Valid values are:
Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256
Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256
Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256
Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal.
Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and
requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure.
Data Rate (Bps) (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream.
The data rate value changes according to the value of
Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters.
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM
signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1
ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1
Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled.
QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close
the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box.
RF On If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams.
Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is
enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 90 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
4.5.2 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the
TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is
license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two
streams are outputted once a license is granted.
MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if
only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for
when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for
when in slot two all four channels of the port are active.
Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a
channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.
To define the out TS parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.
Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below
Field Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Slot Number Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots
arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware
User’s Guide.
Port Number (Read only) Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This
field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF
port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and
Hardware User’s Guide.
QAM Mode The QAM mode defines the number of active QAM
channels. Upon changing the amount of active channels,
all values of RF parameters turn to their default values.
The available options are as follows:
SINGLE - only one active QAM channel
DUAL - two active QAM channels
QUAD - four active QAM channel.
QAM Index Numbers of QAM channels in a sequential order from
1-72. (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs). Along this
range, select the required QAM channel. The channels
are available according to the defined No. of channels.
For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as Triple in
slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7.
QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot change their
No. of channels and their frequency is set to 0.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 91 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below
Field Explanation
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value
is provided by the vendor and may help you when
exporting this database to NMX template. Once you
export this database to NMX template, you can monitor
the serving area and generate statistical reports.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-
>65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation
Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the
RF as defined in the EIA standard.
When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency
defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies
defined by the EIA.
RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the
EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.
You can define another required frequency and then N/A
appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be
divisible by 100.
RF Power Level The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the
power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the
power level of its associated stream (for example, stream
5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify
numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example,
50.5).
Constellation Valid values are:
Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,
QAM256
Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256
Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,
QAM256
Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF
signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered
data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure.
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the
QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values
are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1
ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1
Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled
QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To
close the IF output port of a specific transport stream,
clear the box.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 92 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below
Port Enable If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport
streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to
close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled
only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.
QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
NSCR License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a
NSCR license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a
QAM license was requested and granted.
DOCDTI License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a
DOCDTI license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a
QAM license was requested and granted.
DOC License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a DOC
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
Input Source (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than
Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address
that is provisioned to this QAM.
NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6
standard.
DOCSIS Sync
Compensation
Field Explanation
For Network routing configuration, see 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on
page 96.
4.5.3 Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116)
To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use
the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset
units are ticks of the CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where
1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset
difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define sync
offset value:
1. Measure the average Cable Modem (CM)
timing offset difference. You can view the
timing offset values via the CMTS
console.
2. Define the cable interface to be
compensated.
To fully utilize the bandwidth dedicated to Video On Demand, you may configure the NSG to
broadcast switch broadcast applications or services other than VOD.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 93 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters
NOTE: Verify that in Operation Mode > GbE Mode, Cascading is selected.
To define multicast parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required NSG device(s).
2. In Details, select the Multicast tab.
On the Home tab, in the Editor group, Add is enabled. The Add button is enabled as long
as the Detailed section and the Multicast tab are selected.
3. Click Add.
A record is added.
4. Define the multicast parameters as follows:
Table 4-19: Multicast Parameters NSG 8108 and 9116
NSG 8108 facilitates also two ASI input ports.
For NSG 9116, in Switching mode, two rows of information appear for each GbE port.
4.5.4 Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
To allow an efficient use of the allocated bandwidth and apply the Switched Broadcast
technology, use the Session page to multicast incoming services as explained below:
Sessions configured via the MCT are static services. That is, the services have a permanent
configuration. The configuration is saved on the NVRAM and once you reboot the device, the
configuration of the service is reloaded.
To route a socket
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP (Read only) The IP address of the device.
Multicast No (Read only) An index number.
Multicast Address Type in the multicast address.
Remapped Service ID Type in the output service ID.
UDP Port Type in the required UDP port.
Outputs Select a QAM to output the service.
1. Verify that the Application Mode is VOD\SDV (Select Operation Mode tab > Application
Mode.
2. Select the Sessions tab.
3. In the Sessions page, define the parameters as explained below:
Table 4-20: Session Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 94 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Defining NGOD Parameters
Table 4-20: Session Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
Parameter Explanation
Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the session ID
as it appears in the current page. When working in
standalone mode, session ID starts at 10,000 and you
can configure up to 100 sessions only. When managing
the device via a network management system, you can
configure up to 1000 sessions.
Input GbE Port Number Indicates the number of the input port.
Multicast IP\GbE IP Port Enter either a multicast IP address or the IP address of the
GbE port selected in Input GbE Port Number.
Input UDP Port Enter the depi-remote-id as appears in CMTS console.
Output QAM Number Enter the QAM-RF channel number (1-72).
Socket Pass Through Select to allow socket output without any changes, that is
without remapping and without generating tables. When
this option is selected all services in the socket are
outputted via the selected output port and the Service ID
option is disabled.
Service ID Indicates the service at the output port. When selected
new tables are generated at output.
Source IP Indicates the IP address of the broadcasting source.
4.6 Defining NGOD Parameters
To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG device supports the D6 and R6 Next
Generation On Demand (NGOD) protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol NSG
is always listening on port 554(RTSP).
To configure NGOD and ERM parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select NGOD tab.
3. Define the NGOD and ERM parameters as explained below:
For NSG 9116, see Table 4-21, “NGOD Parameters NSG 9116,” on page 95
For NSG 9000 1.5 & below, see Table 5-17, “NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up,”
on page 128. (NGOD parameters are the same for the various NSG 9000 versions.)
Table 4-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG.
StreamingZone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol.
ComponentName Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 95 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Network Routing Parameters
Table 4-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9116
Parameter Explanation
Bandwidth
Update Threshold
4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters
Once you add an NSG device, five blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each
GbE port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with components,
such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. The Routing tab allows you to define
routing records for the ETH2 port of each NSG. You can define up to five routing IP addresses
for each NSG.
To configure network route parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Routing tab.
3. Configure the required parameters as explained below:
4. Click Save.
Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate
of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the
value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the
updated output bit rate.
Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol.
ERM Enable Select to enable the NSG-ERM communication
ERM IP Address Enter the IP address of the ERM.
ERM Port Enter the number of the ERM TCP port
ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. NSG supports
version 2 which is the default version.
Table 4-22: Network Routing Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Routing No. An index number for each GbE port that is allocated
automatically.
Active Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select
the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters.
Destination Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the
destination device.
Mask Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the
gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG
ETH2 port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 96 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring SNMP Managers and Community
4.8 Configuring SNMP Managers and Community
As soon as you add an NSG in the Platform tab, four SNMP manager records appear in the
following tabs:
NSG 8108 and 9116 - SNMP Manager tab and SNMP Community tab
NSG 9000 - SNMP tab
4.8.1 Configuring SNMP Parameters for NSG 8108 and 9116
To configure the SNMP traps destination
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP Managers SNMP tab.
3. To configure SNMP Traps Destinations, define the parameters as follows:
Table 4-23: SNMP Manager tab parameters
4. Click Save.
To configure SNMP community
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP Community tab.
1. Define the parameters as follows:
2. Click Save.
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.
Manager No. A consecutive number of the SNMP Manager.
Each NSG has up to four managers.
Active Check to activate the SNMP trap.
Manager IP Address Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP
address of the computer to forward to SNMP
traps.
Table 4-24: SNMP Community
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.
Get Community The name of the community having read access. It will
respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is
public.
Set Community The name of the community having write access. It will
respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is
private.
Trap Community The name of the community to which traps are sent. The
default field entry is public.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 97 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL)
4.8.2 Configuring SNMP - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.
3. Define the parameters as follows:
Table 4-25: SNMP Tab for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below
NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.
4.9 Generating Access Control List (ACL)
To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create
either of the following lists of network devices:
Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM
Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM.
To generate ACL
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.
Get Community The name of the community having read access. It will
respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is
public.
Set Community The name of the community having write access. It will
respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is
private.
Trap Community The name of the community to which traps are sent.
The default field entry is public.
Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish
to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP
version.
Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP
traps from the NSG.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab.
3. Select Enable ACL.
4. Select the required ACL Mode:
Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with
the device.
Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the
device.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 98 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL)
5. Select the Access Control List tab.
6.
The Add button is enabled.
Click Add to add a blank row.
7. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 4-26: ACL Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable ACL Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the
Operation Mode tab.
ACL Mode Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Operation Mode tab.
Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited
from communicating with the device.
Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to
communicate with the device.
Index Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the
excluded/included list.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to
communicate or to be banned from communicating with the
device.
IP Mask Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of
network devices to communicate with the device.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 99 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS)
The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by
scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key.
NSG devices support the following CAS modes:
DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.
Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc.
This section guides you on how to define the CAS parameters via MCT for both CAS systems.
4.10.1 Configuring DVB CAS
DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options:
Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM.
Session-based encryption - every VOD session is encrypted using a dedicated control
word, and requires its own ECM.
All NSG models support both DVB-CAS options. Some of the DVB-CAS configuration
parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters are relevant only to one of the
modes.
4.10.1.1 Configuring the EIS Parameters
To encrypt services, NSG needs to communicate with an external EIS (Event Information
Scheduler) that typically is part of the video server. Through the EIS page you set the basic
operation and communication parameters for EIS.
NOTE: When the CAS Enabled option is disabled all changes to CAS parameters are not sent to the
device.
To set EIS attributes
1. Select the DVB-CAS tab.
2. Configure the parameters as explained below:
NSG 8108 and 9116 - Table 4-27, “EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116),” on page 100
NSG 9000 - Table 4-28, “EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below),” on page 101
Table 4-27: EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG.
Static AC When selected, all services are scrambled with the same
control word and ECM PID.
EIS Port The TCP port through which NSG communicates with the
EIS. Valid values range between 0-65535.
CP Duration (sec). The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the
control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X
seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between
5-7200.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 100 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
Table 4-27: EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116)
Parameter Explanation
CA Desc Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA
descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a
service or elementary level or in both levels.
Clear Time on AC Change The clear time in seconds due to the change of Access
Criteria. This field indicates the allowed period of time
without any active access criteria. Valid values range
between 0-9999. The default value is 20 seconds.
ECM PID If Static AC is checked, enter the ECM PID for scrambling
with it all the services.
Super CAS ID (Hex) If Static AC is checked, enter the Super CAD ID of the
ECMG as provided by the vendor.
Access Criteria If Static AC is checked, enter access criteria as provided
by the vendor.
TS ID Provisioning Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following
options:
Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the
output TS ID.
By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the
provisioned output according to the QAM number that
is a number between 1-8. Numbers higher than 8 are
read according to the 1-8 sequence. For example, the
number 9 means output 1 and number 16 means
output 8.
The following table lists the EIS Parameters. It includes the following parameter types:
parameters that are relevant to both modes - no specific indication in the table
parameters that are relevant only for tier-based - specific indication in the table
parameters that are relevant only for session-based - specific indication in the table
Table 4-28: EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG.
CAS Enabled Select this box to enable the CAS to allow the service to
be encrypted. If you change CAS parameters and the CAS
is disabled, changes are not sent to the device.
EIS>SCS Port Number Enabled when in Session based mode. Defines the TCP
port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid
values range between 1-65535.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 101 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
Table 4-28: EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below)
Parameter Explanation
CP Duration (sec). The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the
control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X
seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between
5-7200.
CA Desc Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA
descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a
service or elementary level or in both levels.
Clear to Scramble (sec) The clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the
service once the SCG is received. Valid values range
between 0-7200. The default value is 0 seconds.
Tier based The default DVB scrambling mode is Session based. To
change it to Tier based, select this box. When selected all
services are scrambled with the same control word and
ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the DVB
Tier Based parameters are enabled:
ECM PID If Tier-based is checked, enter the ECM PID for
scrambling with it all the services.
SuperCAS ID If Tier-based is checked, enter the SuperCADS ID of the
ECMG as provided by the vendor.
Access Criteria Enter access criteria as provided by the vendor.
TS ID Provisioning Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following
options:
Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the
output TS ID.
By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the
provisioned output according to the QAM number that
is a number between 1-72.
Note: This parameter is relevant when working in
Sessions based.
Block Upon Failure If Tier based is checked, this parameter is enabled. Check
this parameter to allow the device to block the stream to
protect the content. When a stream is blocked, no picture
appears on the end user screen. This action takes place
in case the NSG 9000 could not establish
communication with the ECMG.
Fail to Scramble Timeout
(Sec)
If Tier based is selected, define the period of time
between outputting the service and activating the Block
Upon Failure feature.
ECMG Failure Retries Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to
establish communication with the Entitlement Control
Message Generator (ECMG) before issuing the alarm
ECMG Connection Failure.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 102 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
4.10.1.2 Defining the ECMG Parameters
ECMG (Entitlement Control Message Generator) parameters specify communication between
the ECM generator and the NSG. Each row in the page represents an ECMG. You can define
up to five ten ECMGs.
If multiple ECMGs are available, the NSG tries to connect to one of them starting from the first
ECMG defined in this page. If the connection fails, the NSG tries to connect to the next
defined ECMG. After connecting to an ECMG, the status of the subsequent devices on the list
remains Disconnected. If the NSG fails to connect to all ECMGs, the system issues the ECMG
connection failure alarm.
To set ECMG attributes
1. Select the ECMG tab.
2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table:
Table 4-29: ECMG Parameters
4.10.2 Privacy Mode
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP of the device.
ECMG No. An index number that indicates the sequential number of the
ECMG. The NSG tries to connect to the ECMGs according to
their order.
Active Check to activate the ECMG. Once you check it you can define
the ECMG parameters.
Name Enter the brand name of the ECMG.
Super CAS ID A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA
vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes
one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The
super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with
each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.
Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1 or 2 for
SimulCrypt Ver. 1 or 2 respectively.
IP Address The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this
value.
Port The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect
the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.
Channel ID A unique numeric value that identifies an NSG specific to the
ECMG.
Privacy Mode allows NSG to encrypt the Video-on-Demand content that is flowing through it.
In PM-enabled systems, NSG devices are grouped into VODS (Video On Demand System.)
Each VODS is accessed by a specific VODS ID and password defined in the Privacy Mode
tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 103 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
Each VODS is assigned with its own unique ECMs which are generated randomly by the ERS.
The ERS sends the MCT application a time indication for checking whether the ECM was
changed (callback) and an ERS Synch Number to notify of a possible change of ECM. The
MCT application checks at each indicated callback time whether the Sync Number has
changed and once a change is detected the MCT application updates all NSGs of the VODS.
To allow an accurate ECM update, set the MCT computer time according to either of the
following:
NTP server - install NTP client on MCT computer. The NTP client is not provided by
Harmonic Inc.
Local network time service - consult your IT personnel.
Table 4-30: Privacy Mode Terminology
NOTE: Prior to configuring the PM parameters, verify that CAS is enabled.
4.10.3 Configuring PM Global Parameters
To effectively utilize the Privacy Mode, you must ensure that it is configured according to your
specific requirements. Use the Privacy Mode tab to set Privacy Mode global parameters.
4.10.3.1 Managing the ECMs
Term Explanation
Callback A UTC time indication at which the MCT application is
requested to connect with the ERS to check whether the
ERS Synch Number has changed. A change in this
number indicates the generation of a new ECM.
ERS Encryption Renewal Server the MCT connects to.
ERS Synch Number When the ERS Synch Number changes, a new ECM is
generated. All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with
the new ECM.
VOD Video On Demand System.
The ECMs are updated either automatically or manually. You can also remove all ECMs from
the selected NSGs.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 104 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
Automatically - The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the
last callback and checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed. Once it was
changed, the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the relevant VODS. If it fails to
communicate with an NSG, it attempts to connect to it every whole hour and to update
the ECM. In addition, upon a restart of the MCT computer, the MCT automatically checks
for changes of the callback and ERS Synch Number and updates the NSGs as required.
Manually - Once you click Update ECM, the MCT application connects to the ERS and if
the ERS Synch Number was changed the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the
relevant VODS.
Purge ECMs - allows to remove all ECMs from the selected NSGs.
To enable automatic ECM update
1. On Privacy Mode tab, in Options group select Auto ECM Update option.
The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the last callback and
checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed.
To update the ECM manually
In case Automatic ECM Update is not checked and you wish to update the ECM, do the
following:
1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs.
2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Update ECM.
The Action Log dialog appears
3. Wait until Finish is enabled.
To purge ECMs
1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs.
2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Purge ECM.
The Action Log dialog appears
3. Wait until Finish is enabled and all ECMs are removed from the selected NSGs.
4.10.3.2 Defining ERS General Parameters
Define ERS general parameters via Privacy Mode tab, Options group:
To define ERS parameters
Select to allow auto ECM update
1. Verify that ERS Type is defined as Production. The default type is Production and the
Development type is for debug purposes only.
2. To define the type of ECM request that is sent to the ERS, open the Cipher Type list and
select either of the following options:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 105 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
DES - a request to generate an ECM that matches the DES scrambling method,
usually used in north America.
DVB - a request to generate an ECM that matches DVB and its scrambling method,
usually used in Europe.
4.10.3.3 Defining ERS Communication Parameters
Define the ERS communication parameters via Privacy Mode tab, ERS Communication group.
1. To define the callback, enter in ERS Query Interval the required time indication in
milliseconds. The default value is 10000msec.
2. To define the timeout upon an HTTPS request, enter in ERS HTTPS Request Timeout the
required time indication in milliseconds. The default value is 30000msec.
3. To check the ERS status, copy into your browser the ERS URL indicated in ERS Server URL
and view the ERS status.
4.10.3.4 Managing the VODS
Manage your VODS via Privacy Mode tab, VODS group:
To select VODS
Open the ID list and select the required VODS.
4.10.3.5 Adding/Removing VODS
NSGs may belong to different VODS who are defined by a unique ID and password. To
identify each VODS, enter a unique VODS ID and password.
To add VODS
1. Click Add.
The ADD VODS dialog appears:
2. Enter the VODS ID and password.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 106 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
3. To complete this procedure, you should validate the VODS ID and password. To validate,
click Verify.
You are asked to wait while the ERS checks the VODS ID and password.
If the VODS details are invalid, an error message appears. You should retry to add the
VODS.
If the VODS details are validated, the following message appears:
4. In the Add VODS dialog, click Add to add the VODS to the VODS list. VODS are listed with
either of the following:
Green check mark - indicates that the VODS details are verified by the ERS.
Red X - indicates that the VODS details are invalid and the ERS did not approve the ID
and password.
.
To remove VODS
1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS to be removed.
2. Click Remove.
The required VODS is removed from the ID list.
VODS details are approved
by the ERS
VODS details are not
approved by the ERS
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 107 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
4.10.3.6 Changing VODS Password
1. Click Change Password.
2. Enter the new password.
3. Click OK.
4.10.3.7 Testing VODS ERS Communication
1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS.
2. Click Test.
A message appears notifying whether the VODS selected in the ID list communicated
with the ERS, and of the callback name and ERS Sync.
3. Click Ok.
4.10.3.8 Monitoring Privacy Mode Operation of a Specific VODS
1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS.
2. To view the log, click View Log.
3. To remove all previous records from log, click Clear Log.
4.10.4 Configuring Privacy Mode Parameters per NSG
4.10.4.1 Defining Privacy Mode Parameters
1. Select the Privacy Mode tab.
2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table:
Table 4-31: Privacy Mode Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable Select to enable encryption.
Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Enter the clear time in seconds before starting
to scramble the service, once an ECM is
received. Valid values range between 0-60. The
default value is 3 seconds.
VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs
to.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 108 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)
Table 4-31: Privacy Mode Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number.
When this number changes, a new ECM is
generated.
ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to
check whether a new ECM was generated.
Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new
ECM or callback.
Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Open the Stream Processing on ECM Expiration list
and select either of the following:
Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the
VODS should be updated with the new
ECM.
Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the
stream.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 109 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Overview
5.1 Overview
Chapter 5
Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up
NOTE: The configuration of NSG 9000 devices running with firmware version 1.5 and up is described in
a separate chapter because version 1.5 consists of different configuration logic. and incorporated major
changes.
Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear
as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs
and their attributes according to the most recent available version.
5.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters
Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start
configuring the device via MCT.
To set platform parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
ETH1 Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
Boot Version The BOOT flash version of the device.
MB FPGA Version The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the main
board.
MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board
Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.
Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2
protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores
any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any
IGMPv3 messages.
DTI Card Exist Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This
field is updated after performing Get From Device.
Use DTI Clock Select to enslave NSG 9000 clock to the DTI clock.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 110 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port
Table 5-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the
Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following:
Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No
automatic switching/activation of ports is done,
regardless of the status of the DTI ports.
Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port
is completely automatic, without any intervention and
without any preference of a specific port. If the active
port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes
the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If
the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This
switching can continue any number of times, without
any preference of a specific port.
Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected
port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred
over the other port. In case that the selected port
fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once
the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically
switches back to the selected port.
DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list
and select either port 1 or 2.
The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto
Revert) is selected.
5.3 Configuring Management Port
The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000 primary IP address is configured as part of the
NSG 9000 installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings.
NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports
to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000 uses the
ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access
Systems (CAS) purposes.
To change configuration of ETH1
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
Eth1 IP Enter a new IP address for Eth1. Once you send it to the
device the NSG IP field is updated accordingly.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 111 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port
Table 5-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.
Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port
Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway
Eth1 PHY Configuration To define the physical layers of the Ethernet
communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of
the following:
Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake
protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to
activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other
end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation.
100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and
communication mode to full duplex.
10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and
communication mode to full duplex.
100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and
communication mode to half duplex.
10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and
communication mode to half duplex.
Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2
Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address
Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address
Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2
communication as explained in Eth1 PHY.
Enable ACL Click to enable Access Control List (ACL). To control the
access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device,
create either of the following lists of network devices:
Network devices with permission to communicate with
the EdgeQAM
Network devices that are prohibited from
communicating with the EdgeQAM.
See, 5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL) on
page 131.
ACL Mode Select either of the following:
Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are
prohibited from communicating with the device.
Include - To create a list of network devices that are
allowed to communicate with the device.
5.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
The NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports.
To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 112 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port
3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:
Table 5-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.
Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are
active.
Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does
not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.
Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.
IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
IP Mask The IP mask of the port.
IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.
IP Address 2 The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
IP Address 3 The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway
of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10
seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.
Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation
is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE
links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a
GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be
cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a
device that does not use it causes communication problems.
NGOD Input
Group Name
Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.
Active Port Select either of the following:
SFP - for an optical fiber
RJ45 - for a copper cable
Port Redundancy Applies to NSG 9000-3G version 1.6 and up. This version supports
1:1 port redundancy. For each input GbE port with fiber/copper SFP,
you can define a backup port with copper RJ-45 connector. The
backup port backs up one primary port only.
To enable port redundancy, select the required port. The parameters
of the backup port are disabled.
You can enable port redundancy only if the port is enabled.
You can disable a port only if port redundancy is disabled.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 113 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port
Table 5-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
5.3.2 RF Module Tab
Parameter Explanation
Enable
Forwarding
Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information
about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab
are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.
To view and configure RF module parameters
Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this
GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in
Destination Port.
Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that
accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions,
see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide
1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)
2. Select the RF Module tab.
3. View/configure the following information:
Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Slot No. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number
between 1- 9.
Actual Card Indicates the actual module type. See Table 5-5: Module
Type on page 115.
Expected Card Indicates the configured module type. See Table 5-
5: Module Type on page 115.
Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European
and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per
QAM-RF channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in
Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes
bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 114 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port
Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up
5.3.2.1 QAM Placement
Parameter Explanation
Constellation To define the required constellation, open the
Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM
constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must
be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values
are:
Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Annex-B 64 and 256
Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded
and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol
rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its
value.
Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab.
NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the
required value for this interleaver.
Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.
QAM Placement Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. See 5.3.2.1 QAM
Placement on page 115.
RF Template Select the required EIA type:
EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers
based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and
EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.
EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel
numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See
EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page 117.
Table 5-5: Module Type
Module Type Explanation
NSG-2R QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port
NSG-2R1G QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port. Channels
frequency is between 53-999MHz.
NSG-8R1G OCTAL, up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. Currently only
four QAM-RF channels are supported.
NOTE: Relevant to QAM-RF module NSG-8R1G only.
The QAM Placement feature allows you to configure the QAM-RF channels as follows:
Block - standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs, depending on the selected ITU-T
Annex.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 115 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Redundancy Parameters
Per QAM - you can place each individual QAM anywhere within the 48Mhz block as long
as the following conditions are met:
QAM placement prevents out-of-block configurations. QAM placement should not
surpass the 48Mhz block.
The order of the frequencies is from lowest to highest.
No overlapping frequencies (according to the symbol rate). The bandwidth range of
each signal does not overlap the bandwidth range of its adjacent signal.
The QAMs frequency steps of RF port 1 and RF port 2 are identical. If QAM
frequencies of RF port 1 are as follows: 500, 506, 515Mhz, offset of +6 and +15 from
the lowest, then the frequencies of RF port 2 should be, for example, as follows: 600,
606, 615.
Switching from Block to Per QAM
Verify that the number of QAM-RF channels is identical in both ports.
When changing from Block to Per QAM, the previously defined frequencies appear and
you can change them as required.
When changing from Per QAM to Block, the default frequencies appear according to the
defined ITU-T Annex.
5.4 Configuring Redundancy Parameters
NSG 9000 supports edge cluster technology. This technology offers high availability obtained
by 1:1 device redundancy. The active and standby devices are configured the same and are
provisioned with the same sessions. However, the output ports of the standby device are
disabled. Both the active and standby device communicate with each other via their Eth1 and
Eth2 ports. See NSG 9000 Software User’s Guide.
To configure edge cluster parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. Select the Edge Cluster tab.
3. Configure the edge cluster parameters as explained below:
Table 5-6: Redundancy Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Eth1 IP Read only. The IP address of the Eth1 port.
Device Redundancy
Mode
5.5 Configuring VOD Parameters
Configure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000 device serves as a highly integrated digital
video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network.
To configure VOD parameters
Select one of the following modes:
Mute - all of the QAM-RF channels are mute
Edge Cluster - the device operates in a redundancy mode
StandAlone - the device operates in a stand alone mode
Eth1 Peer IP Enter the IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device
Eth2 Peer IP Enter the IP address of the Eth2 port of the peer device
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 116 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring VOD Parameters
1. In device Information, select the required device
2. In Details, select the VOD tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method
Emulation Template The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM
Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case,
each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel.
However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the
operation of other devices which require a different
mapping of the QAMs. For detailed information on the
QAM Mapping, see the NSG 9000 Software User’s
Guide.
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or
the Random options to govern the method elementary
streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen
option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See,
4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower
limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the
upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21
to 0x1FF0.
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams.
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value
chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will
round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.
Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version.
This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is
changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 117 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters
Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
5.6 Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters
5.6.1 Redundancy
Parameter Explanation
Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at
the output.
Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters
are enabled:
Original Network ID
Serving Area Location in SAT
To create SAT, serving area should be up to16bits or up
to 65535. See Table 5-11 on page 120.
Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.
Serving Area Location in
SAT
NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the
service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:
Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group.
Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.
Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not
detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time
is longer.
To define SDV redundancy parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SDV tab.
3. Configure the following parameters:
If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location
in SAT list and select one of the following:
TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID.
First Service Name - the serving area is written to the
first service name
Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and
the first service name.
Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.
Session Inactivity Teardown
Threshold (sec)
Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters
Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session
inactivity before the session is removed from the output.
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 118 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication
Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters
Parameter Explanation
NGOD
Redundancy
Mode
ISA Redundancy
Mode
Select one of the following modes:
Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one
redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and
upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the
backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of
the device.
Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000
JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both
groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device
inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.
Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant
services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon
failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result
the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails,
NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.
Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services.
NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services
are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.
See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation.
5.7 Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication
To receive streams provisioned by the ISA SRM set the following parameters.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the ISA tab.
3. Configure the following parameters:
Table 5-9: NSG 9000 (1.5.x & Up) and ISA SRM communication
Parameter Explanation
Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server
(either ERM or SRM) upon reset.
SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.
SRM Port Enter the port number over which the device
communicates with the SRM.
Connection Type Select either TCP or UDP.
Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the
duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA
server.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 119 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date
5.8 Setting Device Time and Date
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Time tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-10: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
IP address Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port
Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP
server, select Enable NTP.
NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
Time Zone Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time
offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC
time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
DST Start Date In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date.
SDT End Date In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date.
5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the
TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is
license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two
streams are outputted once a license is granted.
MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if
only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for
when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for
when in slot two all four channels of the port are active.
Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a
channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.
To define the out TS parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.
Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Field Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Slot Number Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For
slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and
Hardware User’s Guide.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 120 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date
Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Field Explanation
Port Number Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field
indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port
arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware
User’s Guide.
TS No. Read only. Displays the ID of the transport stream carried
over this QAM-RF channel.
# QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels. The number
of active channels is license dependent and by default
two channels are active. Following is a list of the optional
number of active channels:
1 - only one active QAM channel
2 - (Default) two active QAM channels
3 - applies to Annex A only, and activates three QAM
channels
4 - applies to Annex B and C only, and activates four
QAM channels. Applies also to Annex A when an
NSG-8R1G module is mounted and activates four
QAM channels.
Note: In dual, triple and quad, the frequency of the QAM
channels is consecutive and each channel utilizes six or
eight MHz: In ANNEX B and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A
8MHz.
QAM Index The numbers of the QAM channel in a sequential order
from 1-72. (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs).
Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The
channels are available according to the defined No. of
channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined
as Triple in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3,
5, 6 and 7. QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot
change their No. of channels and their frequency is set to
0.
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value
is provided by the vendor and may help you when
exporting this database to NMX template. Once you
export this database to NMX template, you can monitor
the serving area and generate statistical reports.
Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to
16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 5-7 on page 117.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-
>65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation
Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.
QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the
QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can
select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM
Manager table, see Table 5-12: QAM Manager on
page 123.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 121 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date
Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Field Explanation
EIA Type Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF
Module tab.
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the
RF as defined in the EIA standard.
When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency
does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.
RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the
EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.
You can define another required frequency and then N/A
appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be
divisible by 100.
Power per QAM (dBmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the
power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the
power level of its associated stream (for example, stream
5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify
numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example,
50.5).
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the
QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values
are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1
ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1
Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled
Mute QAM By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close
the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box.
CW Select for testing purposes only.
Port Enable If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport
streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to
close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled
only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.
QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
Input Source (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than
Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address
that is provisioned to this QAM.
NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6
standard.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 122 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Network Routing Parameters
Table 5-12: QAM Manager
QAM-RF
Manager
VOD SRM VOD
Service & PID
Remux
NGOD ERM
(default)
NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this
QAM-RF.
5.9 Configuring Network Routing Parameters
See 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 96.
5.10 Broadcast Application
Application Explanation
VOD
SDV
Service & PID
Remux
ISA SRM SDV
VOD
Service & PID
Remux
VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the
incoming streams and automatically routes them,
according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-
RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is
controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager).
The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service
remux or PID remux.
The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding
SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM
may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD
ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled
by selecting Applications > NGOD.
In Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000 allows to route input content to any output, that is
to define a session. NSG 9000 allows to create the following types of sessions:
Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab.
Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab
PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab
All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service
Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are
provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may
also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux.
Pass Through Pass Through The incoming stream is streamed out without any
changes, that is without generating new tables, services
or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough
manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP
port.
M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled
by the CMTS.
D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 123 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application
NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service
or PID.
5.10.1 Defining a Passthrough Session
The Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without
remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the
socket are outputted via the selected output port.
When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the
pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass
through QAM.
5.10.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session
An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is
the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the
active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed
manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket.
To configure a pass through a session
NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See 5.8.1 Configuring TS
Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up on page 120).
1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab.
2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below:
Table 5-13: Pass Through Session Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate
the number of the session in the current page.
Source Type Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a
Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the
primary socket.
Enable Backup Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically
activated upon failure. See 5.10.1.1 Backing Up a
Passthrough Session on page 124.
Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once
backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view
the currently active socket, perform Get From Device.
Multicast Select to enable multicast.
GbE Port No. Enter the required input port.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the
content to the defined GbE port and socket.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 124 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application
Table 5-13: Pass Through Session Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between 1-
72.
5.10.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions
You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the
service with its input ID or to remap it.
When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000
and you can configure up to 500 sessions only.
NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.
To route a service
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-14: Service Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Output QAM
No.
Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the
session.
Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with
the same input ID number or to remap the service.
PID Remap By default, PID Remap is selected. To output a service without
remapping its PIDs, de-select PID Remap.
If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the
output.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 125 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session
5.10.3 Defining PID Remux
You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or
configure up to 576 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID.
You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different
outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.
The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and
remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the
PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor.
To route a PID
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-15: PID Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Input PID
(Hex)
Output QAM
No.
Output PID
(Hex)
PMT
Reference
5.11 Configuring M-CMTS Session
To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the
required input PID number.
Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the PID.
Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID
with the same input PID number or to remap the PID.
To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box.
ES Type If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream
out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to.
Descriptors Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard.
When NSG 9000 is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 126 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session
Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS
Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a
socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables.
To create an M-CMTS session
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab.
3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS.
A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session.
To configure an M-CMTS session
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the
required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below:
Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session Parameters
Parameter
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
DTI Sync
Restamping
Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI
time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI
sync packets.
GbE Port No. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between
1-3.
DOCSIS Sync
Compensation
GbE IP
Address
Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync
Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router
automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM
channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the
EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it
may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the
various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures
consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To
fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS
Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the
CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical
allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define
the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem
(CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values
via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value
for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of
adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port.
To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on
page 128.
Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 127 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session Parameters
Parameter
L2TP Session
ID
Output QAM
No.
Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset
1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions.
2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset.
3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset.
4. Click Ok.
The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to
the required offset.
5.12 Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the
following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:
Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.
Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See
5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up on page 120.
To configure NGOD parameters
Enter the required session ID
View the QAM number (a number between 1-72) that outputs the
session.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.
1. Define the parameters as explained below.
NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD
protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).
Table 5-17: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol
NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol
Bandwidth Update
Threshold (kbps)
Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit
rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches
the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the
updated output bit rate.
Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol.
Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the
Enable ERM (D6) box.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 128 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring CAS Parameters
Table 5-17: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
ERM IP Address Enter the ERM IP address
ERM Port Enter the ERM TCP port number
ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is
the default version.
ERM Keep Alive Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG
to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.
Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6
messages
Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between responses to successive Keep Alive and or
UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration
time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to
re-establish the connection with the ERM.
5.13 Configuring CAS Parameters
For CAS configuration, see 4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) on page 100.
For Privacy Mode general overview, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103. For configuring
Privacy Mode parameters, see following sections.
To configure Privacy Mode parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-18: Privacy Mode Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.
Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).
VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs
to.
Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 129 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SNMP Parameters
Table 5-18: Privacy Mode Parameters
Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number.
When this number changes, a new ECM is
generated.
ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to
check whether a new ECM was generated.
Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new
ECM or callback.
Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following:
Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the
VODS should be updated with the new
ECM.
Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the
stream.
5.14 Configuring SNMP Parameters
The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to
communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it
when required.
The SNMP table allows you to create the following:
A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have
accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.
To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for
the Get community is public.
By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to
monitor specific groups of devices.
To set SNMP parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-19: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable
SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.
Contact Enter contact information
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 130 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL)
Table 5-19: SNMP Parameters
NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.
5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL)
To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create
either of the following lists of network devices:
Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM
Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM.
To generate ACL
Parameter Explanation
Location
(SysLocation)
Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the
host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.
Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network
elements. The elements will respond to this community Get
commands. The default string is public.
Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Management tab.
3. Select Enable ACL.
4. Select the required ACL Mode:
Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with
the device.
Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the
device.
5. Select the Access Control List tab.
6.
The Add button is enabled.
Click Add to add a blank row.
7. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 5-20: ACL Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable ACL Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the
Management tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 131 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL)
Table 5-20: ACL Parameters
Parameter Explanation
ACL Mode Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Management tab.
Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited
from communicating with the device.
Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to
communicate with the device.
Index Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the
excluded/included list.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to
communicate or to be banned from communicating with the
device.
IP Mask Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of
network devices to communicate with the device.
For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page 63.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 132 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Overview
6.1 Overview
Chapter 6
Configuring NSG 9000-6G
Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear
as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs
and their attributes according to the most recent available version.
6.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters on page 133
6.3 Configuring Management Port on page 135
6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G on page 136
6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 139
6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 139
6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters on page 144
6.9 Configuring SDV Parameters on page 151
6.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page 152
6.11 Setting Device Time and Date on page 155
6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156
6.13 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 160
6.14 Configuring Broadcast Parameters on page 160
6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 167
6.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 169
6.17 Configuring CAS Parameters on page 170
6.18 Configuring SNMP Parameters on page 174
6.19 Device Authentication on page 175
6.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters
Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start
configuring the device via MCT.
To set platform parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 133 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Setting NSG Platform Parameters
NOTE: In Version 2.0 only Chassis Serial Number appears.
Table 6-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
ETH1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
GbE FPGA Version The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the GbE
board.
MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board
MB Storage Format Indicates whether a single or dual partition.
See3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware on page 44.
Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.
Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2
protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores
any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any
IGMPv3 messages.
DTI Card Exist Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This
field is updated after performing Get From Device.
Use DTI Clock Select to enslave NSG 9000-6G clock to the DTI clock.
DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the
Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following:
Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No
automatic switching/activation of ports is done,
regardless of the status of the DTI ports.
Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port
is completely automatic, without any intervention and
without any preference of a specific port. If the active
port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes
the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If
the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This
switching can continue any number of times, without
any preference of a specific port.
Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected
port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred
over the other port. In case that the selected port
fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once
the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically
switches back to the selected port.
DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list
and select either port 1 or 2.
The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto
Revert) is selected.
Enable Syslog Select to enable communication with the Syslog server.
Syslog Server IP Address Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP
address of the Syslog server.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 134 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Management Port
Table 6-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
Enable HTTPS Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you
to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol.
Enable HTTP Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin
may disable it via the Web client of the device.
Log Status Change Events Send a notification to the alarm log upon a change in the
status of the DTI client
Send Traps of Status Change Send an SNMP trap upon a change in the status of the
DTI client
6.3 Configuring Management Port
The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000-6G primary IP address is configured as part of
the NSG 9000-6G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address
settings.
NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports
to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000-6G uses the
ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access
Systems (CAS) purposes.
To change configuration of ETH1
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
Eth1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.
Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port
Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 135 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G
NOTE: The PHY configuration is available for version 2.1 and up.
6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G
The NSG 9000-6G is furnished with eight GbE input ports.
6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy
6.4.1.1 Overview
Table 6-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
Eth1 PHY Configuration To define the physical layers of the Ethernet
communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of
the following:
Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake
protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to
activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other
end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation.
100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and
communication mode to full duplex.
10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and
communication mode to full duplex.
100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and
communication mode to half duplex.
10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and
communication mode to half duplex.
Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2
Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address
Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address
Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2
communication as explained in Eth1 PHY.
NSG 9000-6G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port
redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the
following scenarios describe:
VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use
1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP
Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active.
Broadcast application - to allow redundancy for IP multicast streams, you should use 1:1
port redundancy.
SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP multicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and
N:1 redundancy modes:
1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same
IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This
mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures.
N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports,
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 136 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G
by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and
recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports
and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up
ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the
streams of the failed primary port(s).
If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, select Exclusive N:1
Backup. The backup port transmits the content of the first failed primary port only and
overflow of the backup port is prevented.
In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature:
A primary port cannot serve as a backup port
If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out and the Exclusive
N:1 Backup option is automatically enabled. When the primary port fails, the backup port
is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port.
Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In cast Same IP Address is
selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port
IP address.
Alarm configuration:
By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy.
The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same.
You can configure the alarms of a primary port only.
When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also
applies to the backup port.
In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all
of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an
additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary
port.
Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and
to all primary ports it backs up.
Upon redundancy switch, automatically the configured backup port is activated. If the
backup port fails, a redundancy switch is performed to return to the Primary. If the
primary port is still faulty, the redundancy mechanism, re-checks the last active port for a
momentary failure. If it is still faulty, the redundancy switch reverts to the primary and
keeps checking in increased intervals the configured backup port, until detecting an
active port.
To configure the NSG 9000-6G GbE ports
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE tab.
3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:
NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only.
Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.
Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are
active.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 137 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G
Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
Enable Port Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does
not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.
Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.
IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
IP Mask The subnet mask.
Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway
of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10
seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.
Refresh Interval Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request.
Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation
is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE
links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a
GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be
cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a
device that does not use it causes communication problems.
NGOD Input
Group Name
NGOD Assigned
Bandwidth
(Mbps)
Enable
Forwarding
Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.
Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM.
The default is 1000Mbps, that is the full capacity of the port is
assigned for the NGOD ERM. You can enter a value between 0-1000
in increments of 100. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for
the NGOD ERM.
Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this
GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in
Destination Port.
Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that
accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions,
see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide
Backup Port If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port
X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a
backup to more than one primary port.
Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are
provisioned to the port.
Same IP In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams,
you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for
each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked.
Trigger Link
Down
Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.3 and up. By default Link Down is
checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy.
Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger redundancy.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 138 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G
6.4.2 Input Forwarding
Parameter Explanation
Trigger No Input
Traffic
NSG 9000-6G support IP forwarding for monitoring a GbE port. For explanation, see Table 6-
3 on page 137.
6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information
about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab
are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.
6.5.1 QAM-RF Module Redundancy
The RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF
module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an
additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy
module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the
QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices.
For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply:
Up to 8 of the NSG 9000-6G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and
provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should
be Broadcast.
NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only.
The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy
purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast.
The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected
Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated
with the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between
10-20 seconds.
Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies:
All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network.
When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required.
NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection
against various failures and shorter fail-over time.
To view and configure RF module parameters
Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.3 and up. By default No Input
Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port
redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not trigger
redundancy.
1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)
2. Select the RF Module tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 139 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
3. View/configure the following information:
Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Slot No. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number
between 1- 9.
Actual Card Indicates the actual module type. NSG-6G supports the
NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card that supports
up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port.
Expected Card Indicates the configured module type.
Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European
and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per
QAM-RF channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in
Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes
bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
Constellation To define the required constellation, open the
Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM
constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must
be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values
are:
Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Annex-B 64 and 256
Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded
and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol
rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its
value.
Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab.
NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the
required value for this interleaver.
Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.
QAM Placement Read only. Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. Block is the
standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs along the
48Mhz block, depending on the selected ITU-T Annex.
RF Template Select the required EIA type:
EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers
based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and
EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.
EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel
numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See
EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page 117.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 140 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy
Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
Enable Redundancy Select to enable module redundancy. See 6.5.1 QAM-RF
Module Redundancy on page 139.
6.6 RF Module Redundancy
6.6.1 RF Module Redundancy Overview
The RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF
module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an
additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy
module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the
QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices.
For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply:
Up to 8 of the NSG 9000-6G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and
provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should
be Broadcast.
NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only.
The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy
purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast.
The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected
Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated with
the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between 10-20
seconds.
Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies:
All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network.
When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required.
NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection
against various failures and shorter fail-over time.
6.6.2 Enabling the RF Module Redundancy
By default, QAM-RF module redundancy is disabled. To start RF module redundancy, do the
following:
1. Read information from the device. (Select the device and click Get from Device.)
2. Select the RF Module tab and select Enable Redundancy for at the required RF Module.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 141 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy
The record of module 9 is disabled. You cannot change the configuration of the backup
module
3. In the message that appears, Click OK. The message notifies that once redundancy
configuration is applied, the RF ports of module nine will shut down.
4. Send to device.
6.6.2.1 Manual Fail Over
Once the module is faulty, the module in slot nine takes its place.
At any time you can generate a module redundancy switch to a module of your choice.
To generate a manual fail over
1. In Device Information section, select the required device.
The Module Redundancy group in enabled.
2. Click RF Module Redundancy group.
The record of slot 9 is
disabled
Device is selected in Device
Information
Enabled Redundancy for at
least one slot is enabled
RF Module Redundancy group
is enabled
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 142 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy
The following dialog appears:
3. RF Module Number displays the module number with RF module redundancy enabled. To
select another module, open the RF Module list and select the required RF module.
4. To generate a manual fail-over, click Activate Backup Module.
The Action dialog opens.
5. Wait until action is successfully sent to device.
6.6.3 Reverting Redundancy Module
Reverting back to the primary QAM-RF module once the fault is fixed is manual only.
1. In Device Information section, select the required device.
The Module Redundancy group in enabled.
2. Click RF Module Redundancy group.
The following dialog appears:
3. Click Revert to Primary.
Device is selected in Device
Information
RF Module Redundancy group
is enabled
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 143 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
6.7.1 EdgeCluster Overview
The edgeCluster is comprised of two devices defined as primary and backup. Typically the
primary device is active and the backup device is in standby mode. Both devices are
configured the same except for the management ports. Both devices are provisioned with
sessions that are transmitted by the primary/active device. The backup device stands by
ready to become active upon primary failure or manual redundancy switch. Both devices, the
primary and the backup communicate with each other via their Eth1 and Eth2 ports:
Eth1 - management port connection. See NSG 9000-6G Hardware and Installation User
Guide. Each device is configured with a unique management port, IP address of Eth1.
Eth2 - Each device is configured with a unique IP address of Eth2. The subnet of Eth2
ports should be different than the subnet of Eth1 ports. Eth2 ports are connected with an
Ethernet crossover cable.
The edgeCluster system described above applies to both M-CMTS and Broadcast
deployments with the following differences:
Table 6-5: EdgeCluster M-CMTS Versus Broadcast
Item Deployment Difference
Connectivity M-CMTS No use of GbE switch.
The downstream GbE port of the GbE source is directly
connected to the NSG GbE input ports.
GbE Input
Ports
Redundancy
Switch
Broadcast The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be
configured the same. However, each device should have a
unique IP address of the input port.
M-CMTS The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be
configured the same including the IP addresses of the GbE
input ports.
Note: For proper edgeCluster operation, GbE ports of the primary
and backup devices should have fiber SFPs.
M-CMTS Upon redundancy switch, the active device momentarily
shuts up its GbE ports to signal the source device that the
device is faulty.
The following instructions assume that you wish to apply edgeCluster to devices via MCT. The
devices are controlled by MCT and you obtained the configuration via Get from Device. See
3.8.2 Synchronizing Configurations on page 54. For the physical connections, see NSG
9000-6G version 2.7 Software Guide.
6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration
NOTE: The following explanation applies to NSG9000-6G version 2.7.0.0 and up.
1. Verify that you are in NSG9000-6G filter.
2. Click MCT button.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 144 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
3. Click MCT Options.
4. Select General.
5. In General Properties section, select EdgeCluster Display.
Select EdgeCluster
In the MCT ribbon, in the Home tab, the EdgeCluster group appears. Its options are
disabled.
In Device Information, the edgeCluster parameters appear and only EdgeCluster Mode is
enabled.
To enable the EdgeCluster group, configure the edgeCluster parameters for both devices
with proper peer IP values. Upon selecting one of the edgeCluster devices, the
EdgeCluster group is enabled.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 145 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
The edgeCluster group includes the following buttons:
Table 6-6: EdgeCluster Group
Button Explanation
Sync Cluster Synchronizes the configuration in the cluster. See
6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster on page 147.
Get State Click to update the current state of the device in the
edgeCluster: Active, Standby, Failed, N/A.
Set to Active Enabled when device is part of an edgeCluster and the
state of the device is standby or failed.
6.7.3 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
1. Verify that the expected firmware version of the devices is version 2.7.0.0 and up.
2. Verify that Eth2 of both devices is enabled. In Details, select the Management tab and
verify that Enable ETH2 is selected.
3. Configure the edgeCluster parameters as follows:
Table 6-7: EdgeCluster Parameters
Parameter Explanation
EdgeCluster Mode To allow the edgeCluster mode, select either one of the
edgeCluster modes:
Automatic - the redundancy switch takes place automatically
upon active device failure
Manual - the redundancy switch is manual only using the Set to
Active button.
Note: When you select one of the above modes, you enable the
rest of the edgeCluster parameters that are configurable.
Disabled - edgeCluser is disabled. Select this mode in case
you want to disable the edgeCluster mode: All the edgeCluster
parameters are disabled.
Role Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the
role of the device:
Primary
Backup
State Read only. Indicates the state of the device: Active, Standby, or
Failed with indication of the last time the state was updated. To
update the state, click Get State in the EdgeCluster group.
EdgeCluster
Application
Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select
either of the following:
Broadcast
M-CMTS
Eth1 Peer IP Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the
IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device. The list is
populated with all NSG9000-6G devices on the current site with
the same version that are not part of another cluster.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 146 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
Table 6-7: EdgeCluster Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Eth2 Peer IP Updated as soon as you select the Eth1 peer IP.
Once you defined the Eht1 Peer IP and Eth2 Peer IP, the EdgeCluster group is enabled.
4. If the configuration of the devices to work in the edgeCluster mode is not the same, move
to 6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster on page 147.
If the configuration of the devices to works in the edgeCluster mode is the same, as
explained in 6.7.1 EdgeCluster Overview on page 144, send the edgeCluster
configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgeCluster peer.
For guidelines for working with devices in edgeCluster, see 6.7.5 Working with Devices in
EdgeCluster on page 148.
6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster
The configuration of both devices of the edgeCluster should be the same. Sync. Cluster
feature, allows you to copy configuration from a device to its peer device. All configuration is
copied from one device to the other except for the following:
MCT Section Parameter that is not copied
Information Device IP
Device Name
Rack
Slot
Comments
NMX Network group
Actual Firmware Version
Expected Firmware Version
Edge Cluster parameters
Platform Eth1 IP
GbE FPGA Version
MB Serial Number
MB Storage Format
Chassis Serial Number
GbE IP Address
IP Mask
RF Module:
Actual Card
Expected Card
Serial Number
Management MAC Address
Eth1 Mask
Gateway
Eth2 IP
Eth2 IP Mask
Authentication all parameters
SDV ISA redundancy mode
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 147 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
To sync. configuration
1. In Device Information section, select a device.
The EdgeCluster group is enabled.
2. Click Sync. Cluster .
The following dialog appears:
3. The From list is populated with both edgeCluster peers. Open the list and select either
primary or backup device.
4. The To list is populated with both edgeCluster peers. Open the list and select either
primary or backup device.
5. Click Sync Configuration.
6. Wait until the action is completed successfully. The edgeCluster devices have the same
configuration.
7. Send the edgeCluster configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgeCluster
peer.
6.7.5 Working with Devices in EdgeCluster
When you want to get configuration from a device in edgeCluster, by using the Get From
Device feature, the edgeCluster configuration of the device and MCT should be identical.
In the Device Information section, edgeCluster devices are organized in their clusters and
each cluster has a unique color.
The Sort button , allows you to sort the clusters. Primary device is usually the first.
6.7.6 EdgeCluster Maintenance
MCT Section Parameter that is not copied
Virtual IPs All parameters
Licensing All parameters
Routing All parameters
6.7.6.1 EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade on page 149.
6.7.6.2 Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode on page 149.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 148 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters
6.7.6.1 EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade
When you wish to upgrade the firmware of NSG 9000-6G devices working in EdgeCluster
mode, perform the following steps in their provided order.
The provided instructions refer to upgrade from firmware version 2.7.0.0 and above. For
upgrade of older versions while devices are in edgeCluster mode, call customer support.
To upgrade the firmware of the MSG 9000 device in EdgeCluster Mode
NOTE: During this procedure you are instructed to upgrade the firmware of the Backup device first.
Table 6-8: EdgeCluster Firmware Upgrade
Primary Device Backup Device
1. Verify that both devices are working properly.
6. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on
page 46.
7. Verify that the device is running
properly with the newly installed
firmware
8. In Device Information, select the
primary device.
9. Click Set to Active.
Note: Services are flowing through the
primary device.
6.7.6.2 Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode
2. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on
page 46.
3. Verify that the device is running properly with
the newly installed firmware and apply the
required configuration to the device.
Note: The backup device is currently working with
the new firmware.
4. In Device Information, select the Backup
device.
5. Click Set to Active.
Note: Services are flowing through the
backup device
The following instructions refer to devices that work in edgeCluster mode and you need to
replace a faulty QAM-RF module or power supply.
1. Verify that the device with the faulty module is in Standby state.
2. Replace faulty module. See NSG9000-6G Hardware and Installation Guide.
3. Verify that the device is working properly.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 149 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring VOD Parameters
4. Apply EdgeCluster by configuring the required role in the edgeCluster. See 6.7.2 Enabling
EdgeCluster Configuration on page 144.
6.8 Configuring VOD Parameters
Configure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000-6G device serves as a highly integrated
digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP
network.
To configure VOD parameters
1. In device Information, select the required device
2. In Details, select the VOD tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
NOTE: Encryption Mode, Emulation Template and Serving Area Location attributes apply to version 2.1
and up only.
Table 6-9: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method
Note: currently only PM scrambling is available.
Emulation Template The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM
Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case,
each RF-QAM port accommodates up to eight channels.
The NSG 9000-6G device may emulate the operation of
other NSG 9000 3GbE devices which require a different
mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG 9000
3GbE, NSG 9000-6G routes the UDP range to a QAM.
For example UDP 0x501 is routed to QAM=1.2.1,
Service ID=1.
You can select one of the customized emulation
templates and send them to the device.
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or
the Random options to govern the method elementary
streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen
option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See,
4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower
limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the
upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 150 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring SDV Parameters
Table 6-9: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-6G
Parameter Explanation
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams.
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value
chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will
round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.
Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version.
This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is
changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).
Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at
the output.
Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters
are enabled:
Original Network ID
Serving Area Location in SAT
Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits
(range of 1- 65535). See Table 6-17 on page 157.
Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.
Serving Area Location in
SAT
6.9 Configuring SDV Parameters
NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the
service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:
Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group.
Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.
Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not
detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time
is longer.
To define SDV redundancy parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SDV tab.
If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location
in SAT list and select one of the following:
TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID.
First Service Name - the serving area is written to the
first service name
Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and
the first service name.
Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.
Session Inactivity Teardown
Threshold (sec)
Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session
inactivity before the session is removed from the output.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 151 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication
3. Configure the following parameters:
Table 6-10: SDV Redundancy parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
NGOD
Redundancy
Mode
ISA Redundancy
Mode
Select one of the following modes:
Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one
redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and
upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the
backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of
the device.
Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000
JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both
groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device
inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.
Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant
services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon
failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result
the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails,
NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.
Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services.
NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services
are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.
See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation.
6.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication
To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the ISA tab.
3. Configure the following parameters:
Table 6-11: NSG 9000-6G and ISA SRM communication
Firmware
Version
Parameter Explanation
N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
N/A Enable Reset
Indication
If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server
(either ERM or SRM) upon reset.
N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.
N/A SRM Port Enter the port number over which the device
communicates with the SRM.
N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the
duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA
server.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 152 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication
Table 6-11: NSG 9000-6G and ISA SRM communication
Firmware
Version
N/A Report PMT Section
(QuerySessionInfo)
2.6.0-
2.6.3
Input Port for Shell
Session
2.6.4 SDV Load-sharing Port
A
SDV Load-sharing Port
B
2.6.5 SDV Load-Sharing Port
A - D
N/A Enable Announce
Message
Parameter Explanation
When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet
data is sent to the ISA server.
Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input port
indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.
Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input port
indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.
Optional configuration. Configure this parameter
when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the
NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for
SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input
port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are
equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic
to the port defined as the first input port for SDV
sessions.
Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input
ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D
boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV
Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE
input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV
traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the
selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to
the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV
ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends
the traffic to the ports according to the sequential
order of the port numbers.
NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a
sequential order from one to eight. Port number can
be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0
as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0.
NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load
sharing port, cannot be a backup port.
Check to enable the announce message indication
required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This
message is sent to the SRM due to the following:
Provisioning a service
Alarm is raised on the session
A redundancy switch over the session source
Session is missing from the output
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 153 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication
6.10.1 Defining Virtual ISA Devices
To enable the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgQAM, use the
virtual IPs for ISA feature. This feature creates virtual IPs only for the use of the ISA server. To
create virtual ISA IPs, do the following:
Create virtual IPs - requires to define the following:
Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a
subnet other than Eth2 subnet.
GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the GbE ports. GbE Virtual IP
can be the same as the physical GbE IP.
Associate virtual devices with VOD QAM manager or ISA SRM QAM Manager.
6.10.1.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA) tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 6-12: NSG 9000-6G Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
Virtual IP Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be
different than the physical Eth1 IP address and on a subnet other
than Eth2.
Mask Enter a subnet mask
Status In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP:
In Use - the virtual IP is currently in use
No in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use
6.10.1.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP (ISA)
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs (ISA) tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 6-13: NSG 9000-6G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
GbE Port Enter the GbE virtual port number.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 154 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Setting Device Time and Date
Table 6-13: NSG 9000-6G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA)
Parameter Explanation
Virtual IP Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual
IPs.
Mask Enter the required mask IP
Management IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port
6.10.1.3 To associate virtual devices with ISA
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices (ISA) tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 6-14: NSG 9000-6G Virtual Devices (ISA)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
Eth1 Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The
list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously.
GbE Port: Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is
propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The
GBE interface appears in the following format:
:, where x is the physical GbE port of the
edgeQAM, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE
interface.
Virtual Input Port Enter the required port according to the ISA provisioning.
6.11 Setting Device Time and Date
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Time tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-15: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.0
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port
Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP
server, select Enable NTP.
NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 155 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 6-15: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.0
Parameter Explanation
Time Zone Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time
offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC
time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
DST Start Date In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date.
SDT End Date In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date.
Table 6-16: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and Up
Parameter Explanation
IP address Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port
Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP
server, select Enable NTP.
NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
Enable Daylight Saving Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location
and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving
time is automatically defined according to the selected
location and city/province.
Time Offset Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open
the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to
match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and
the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Location Select the required location.
City/Province Select the required city/province.
6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters
For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 144 transport stream rows under the
TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is
license dependent. If in # QAMs Per Port, two channels are defined, only two QAM channels
are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted.
MCT allocates for each port a maximum of eight index numbers for the TS IDs. For example,
if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 - 8 are reserved for
when all eight channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 11 - 16 are reserved for
when in slot two all eight channels of the port are active.
Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a
channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.
To define the out TS parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 156 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters
NOTE: PM License and NGOD QAM Group Name apply to version 2.1 and up only.
Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G
Field Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Slot Number Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For
slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and
Hardware User’s Guide.
Port Number Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field
indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port
arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware
User’s Guide.
QAM No. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential
order from 1-144. (Basically there are up to 144 output
TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel.
The channels are available according to the defined No.
of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is
defined as three in slot 1 the available QAM channels are
1, 2, 3, 9, 10 and 11.
# QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels from 1-8
active channels (Annex B & C) and 1-6 Annex A. The
number of active channels is license dependent and by
default two channels are active.
Note: The frequency of the QAM channels is consecutive
and each channel utilizes six or eight MHz: In ANNEX B
and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A 8MHz.
QAM Index Read only. Displays the The number of the QAM channels
of the QAM-RF module in a sequential order from
2x (1-8).
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value
is provided by the vendor and may help you when
exporting this database to NMX template. Once you
export this database to NMX template, you can monitor
the serving area and generate statistical reports.
Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to
16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 6-9 on page 150.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-
>65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation
Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.
QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the
QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can
select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM
Manager table, see Table 6-18: QAM Manager on
page 159.
EIA Type Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF
Module tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 157 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the
RF as defined in the EIA standard.
When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency
does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.
RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the
EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.
You can define another required frequency and then N/A
appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be
divisible by 100. The allowed ranges indicating the center
frequencies:
Annex B & C - 35,000,000-999,000,000 Hz
Annex A - 36,000,000-998,000,000 Hz
Frequencies below 50MHz are for special Broadcast
deployments that require IF output.
Power Level per QAM
(dBmV)
Power Level Per QAM
(dBuV)
Field Explanation
The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the
power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the
power level of its associated stream (for example, stream
5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify
numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example,
50.5).
Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dBuV. Once
you enter the power level per QAM in dBmV, this
parameter is updated to display the power level also in
dBuV. Applies to NSG9000-6G version 2.6.0.0 and up.
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the
QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values
are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
In ANNEX-B Interleaver value depens on the
constellation
Constellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, 128-1
Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled
Mute QAM By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close
the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box.
CW Select for testing purposes only.
Enable RF Port If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport
streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to
close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled
only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.
QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 158 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G
PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM
license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM
license was requested and granted.
GbE Port The GbE port that is provisioned to the QAM.
GbE IP Address The IP address of the GbE port that is provisioned to the
QAM.
UDP Port Min The first UDP port provisioned to the QAM.
UDP Port Max The last UDP port provisioned to the QAM.
NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6
standard.
NOTE: Version 2.o supports QAM managers VOD SRM and ISA SRM only.
Table 6-18: QAM Manager
QAM-RF
Manager
VOD SRM VOD
Service & PID
Remux
NGOD ERM
(default)
Field Explanation
Application Explanation
VOD
SDV
Service & PID
Remux
ISA SRM SDV
VOD
Service & PID
Remux
VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the
incoming streams and automatically routes them,
according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-
RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is
controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager).
The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service
remux or PID remux.
The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding
SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM
may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD
ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled
by selecting Applications > NGOD.
All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service
Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are
provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may
also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux.
Broadcast PID Range The device allows to pass a specific range of PIDs from
an input stream to the output.
M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled
by the CMTS.
D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 159 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Network Routing Parameters
NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this
QAM-RF.
6.13 Configuring Network Routing Parameters
See 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 96.
6.14 Configuring Broadcast Parameters
In Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000-6G allows to route input content to any output,
that is to define a session. NSG 9000-6G allows to create the following types of sessions:
Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab. Applies to
version 2.1 and up.
Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab
PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab. Applies to version 2.1 and
up.
NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service
or PID.
6.14.1 Defining Passthrough Sessions
The Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without
remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the
socket are outputted via the selected output port.
When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the
pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass
through QAM.
6.14.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session
An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is
the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the
active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed
manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket.
To configure a pass through a session
NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See 6.12 Configuring TS
Out Parameters on page 156).
1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab.
2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below:
Table 6-19: Pass Through Session Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate
the number of the session in the current page.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 160 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 6-19: Pass Through Session Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Source Type Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a
Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the
primary socket.
Enable Backup Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically
activated upon failure. See 6.14.1.1 Backing Up a
Passthrough Session on page 160.
Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once
backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view
the currently active socket, perform Get From Device.
Multicast Select to enable multicast.
GbE Port No. Enter the required input port.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the
content to the defined GbE port and socket.
Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between 1-
144.
6.14.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions
You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the
service with its input ID or to remap it.
When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000
and you can configure up to 100 sessions only.
NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.
To route a service
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-20: Service Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 161 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 6-20: Service Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Output QAM
No.
6.14.3 Defining PID Remux
You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or
configure up to 1152 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID.
You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different
outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.
The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and
remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the
PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor.
To route a PID
Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the
session.
Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with
the same input ID number or to remap the service.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-21: PID Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Input PID
(Hex)
To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the
required input PID number.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 162 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 6-21: PID Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
Input PID
(Dec)
Output QAM
No.
Output PID
(Hex)
Output PID
(Hex)
PMT
Reference
6.14.4 PID Range Sessions
NSG 9000-6G allows to manually route various content elements to any output QAM
channel. NSG 9000-6G version 2.6.0 and up allows to create PID range sessions. The PID
Range option allows to break down the input stream into ranges and to multiplex them via
various outputs while remapping the PIDs. To output a socket without any changes, that is
without remapping and without generating tables, use the default PID range 0x0 - 0x1FFE.
Defining a PID Range sessions, includes the following stages:
Defining the input stream and PID ranges
Associating the PID ranges with output QAMs
The following table lists PID range specifications
6.14.4.1 Defining PID Ranges of the Input Stream
Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Input PID
(Hex).
Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the PID.
Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID
with the same input PID number or to remap the PID.
Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Output
PID (Hex).
To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box.
ES Type If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream
out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to.
Descriptors Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard.
Table 6-22: PID Range Sessions Specifications
Parameter Specification
Input PID Range inputs Up to 2000 per device
Up to 144 per input
Output QAM Manager Broadcast only
PID Range Output Up to 15 per QAM-RF
1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is
NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.
2. In Details, select the PID Range Input tab.
3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Input tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 163 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
4. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-23: PID Range Input Tab
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the
session in the current page.
Type Indicates whether Primary or backup.
Enable Backup Allows to enable backup session. Enable for backup ports only.
See 6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 136.
Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once you
enable a backup socket, check this option to activate the required
socket.
Multicast By default, Multicast is enabled. Select to enable multicast. If
selected, the IP Address box is enabled.
GbE Port No. In GbE Port No., select the required input port. Once you define
the required GbE port, the IP Address field is updated to display
the IP address of the selected port.
UDP Port Enter the UDP port of the input GbE port
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the
content to the defined GbE port and socket.
Source Name Enter the name of the upstream device that streams the content to
the defined GbE port and socket. The name should be unique.
PID Range Click to open the grid PID Range for Session #. See Table 6-24 on
page 164.
You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when
creating PID range sessions. See 6.14.4.4 Excluding Designated
PIDs on page 165.
Output QAMs Click to open the grid Output QAMs for Session #. See Table 6-25
on page 165.
6.14.4.2 Configuring PID Range Parameters
1. Once you click the ellipsis under PID Range, at least one record appears. You can add
ranges by clicking Add Range in the Editor group.
2. Configure the PID Range parameters according to the following explanation:
NOTE: The default PID range 0x0 - 0x1FFE
Table 6-24: PID Range Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 164 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 6-24: PID Range Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of
the session in the current page.
Index Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of
the PID range in the current session. You can add up to
144 ranges per session.
PID Range Start
(Hex)
PID Range Start
(Dec)
6.14.4.3 Viewing the Output QAMs
1. Once you click the ellipsis under Output QAMs, you may view the output configuration of
the PID Range output. You can view the parameters only after associating a PID range
with an output.
2. View the output QAMs per input stream as explained below:
6.14.4.4 Excluding Designated PIDs
Enter, in hex, the first PID in the PID range
Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered
in PID Range Start (Hex).
PID Range End (Hex) Enter, in Hex, the last PID in the PID range.
PID Range End (Dec) Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered
in PID Range End (Hex).
Table 6-25: Output QAMs per Session (Input Stream)
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read Only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
RF Output Read Only. Indicates the RF output port. QAM manager
should be Broadcast.
QAM Frequency Read Only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM.
Source Name Read Only. Indicates the name of the upstream device that
streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket.
The name is unique.
Ranges (Hex) Read Only. Indicates the range of the PID Range input
session. It shows the start and end PIDs in hexa and in
decimal. For example 0x0-0x1FFE (0 - 8190).
PID Remapping Start
(hex)
PID Remapping End
(hex)
Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the first remapped PID of the
PID range.
Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the last remapped PID of the
PID range for the selected source.
You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when creating PID range sessions.
You need to add a range of PID range sessions.
1. Once you are configuring an Input PID session click under PID Range the Ellipses button.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 165 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
The PID Range Session grid appears and the Add and Add Range buttons are enabled.
2. Click Add Range.
The following dialog appears:
3. Select the designated PIDs you wish to exclude from the range:
NIT - PID 0x10, SDT - PID 0x11, EIT - PID 0x12
4. Click OK.
5. In the grid, rows are added according to your choice. For example, if you wish to exclude
the PIDs designated for the NIT, SDT and ERT tables the following ranges are added:
0x0-F and 0x13-1FFF
Add and Add
Range buttons are
enabled
6.14.4.5 Defining PID Ranges of the Output Stream
PID Range Input
Session #
1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is
NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.
2. In Details, select the PID Range Output tab.
3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Output tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 166 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters
4. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-26: PID Range Output Tab
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
RF Output Select the required RF output port. RF output port is indicated as
follows x.y.z, where:
x - indicates the slot
y - indicates the RF port
z - indicates the QAM
QAM Frequency Read only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM as defined in
6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156.
Source Name Open the list and select the required input according to its source
name configured in PID Range Input. See Table 6-23: PID Range
Input Tab on page 164.
Ranges (hex) The Ranges list is populated with the PID range session defined
for the input. Open the list and select the required PID range of
the selected session.
PID Remapping
Start (hex)
PID Remapping End
(hex)
6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters
NOTE: For NSG9000-6G - Applies to version 2.1 and up only.
When the edgeQAM is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following:
Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS
Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a
socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables.
To create an M-CMTS session
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab.
3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS.
A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session.
To configure an M-CMTS session
Enter, in hexadecimal, the first remapped PID of the PID range.
Enter, in hexadecimal, the last remapped PID of the PID range.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 167 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters
3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the
required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below:
Table 6-27: M-CMTS Session Parameters
Parameter
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
DTI Sync
Restamping
Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI
time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI
sync packets.
GbE Port No. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between
1-8.
IP Address. In unicast - Enter the IP address of the GbE input port.
In multicast - Enter the multicast IP address.
DOCSIS Sync
Compensation
L2TP Session
ID
Output QAM
No.
Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync
Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router
automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM
channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the
EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it
may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the
various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures
consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To
fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS
Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the
CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical
allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define
the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem
(CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values
via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value
for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of
adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port.
To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on
page 168.
Enter the required session ID
View the QAM number that outputs the session.
Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset
1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions.
2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset.
3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset.
4. Click Ok.
The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to
the required offset.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 168 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring NGOD Parameters
6.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters
NOTE: Applies to version 2.1 and up only.
When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the
following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:
Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.
Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See
6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156.
To configure NGOD parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.
1. Define the parameters as explained below.
NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD
protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).
Table 6-28: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol
NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol
Bandwidth Update
Threshold (kbps)
Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit
rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches
the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the
updated output bit rate.
Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255).
Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the
Enable ERM (D6) box.
ERM IP Address Enter the ERM IP address
ERM IP Port Enter the ERM TCP port number
ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is
the default version.
ERM Keep Alive Read only. A a period of time in seconds to indicate the
duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by
the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.
Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6
messages
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 169 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters
Table 6-28: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up
Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between responses to successive Keep Alive and or
UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration
time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to
re-establish the connection with the ERM.
6.17 Configuring CAS Parameters
The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by
scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG
9000-6G supports the following CAS systems:
DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.
Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc. For Privacy Mode
general overview and configuration, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103.
The following table describes the CAS support of the various NSG 9000-6G versions:
Table 6-29: CAS Support of NSG 9000-6G versions
NSG 9000-6G
Version
Parameter Explanation
6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode
By default the CAS mode is PM Scrambling. To change to DVB-CAS mode, do the following:
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select VOD tab > Encryption Mode parameter.
3. Open the Encryption Mode list and select DVB Scrambling.
The configurable DVB Scrambling parameters which are arranged in the DVB CAS related
tabs are enabled.
6.17.2 Configuring PM Parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.
CAS Support Instructions Reference
Version 2.1 - 2.2 Privacy Mode scrambling General overview, see page 103.
Configuration instructions, see page 170
Version 2.3 & up Privacy Mode scrambling
DVB CAS
Privacy Mode:
General overview, see page 103.
Configuration instructions, see page 170.
DVB CAS - see page 171.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 170 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-30: Privacy Mode Parameters
6.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS
DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options:
Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM.
Session-based encryption - default option. Every VOD session is encrypted using a
dedicated control word, and requires its own ECM.
Some of the DVB-CAS configuration parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters
are relevant only to one of the modes.
6.17.3.1 Enabling CAS Mode
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.
Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).
VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs
to.
Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number.
When this number changes, a new ECM is
generated.
ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to
check whether a new ECM was generated.
Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new
ECM or callback.
Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following:
Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the
VODS should be updated with the new
ECM.
Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the
stream.
To configure the DVB Scrambling parameters, select the DVB Scrambling mode. See
6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode on page 170.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 171 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters
6.17.3.2 Defining DVB Scrambling Parameters
Once you selected the DVB Scrambling mode configure the DVB Settings. The following table
lists the DVB Scrambling parameters:
Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Indicates the management IP address of the NSG 9000-
6G device.
Enable DVB CAS Select to enable DVB CAS. Only once enabled, the DVB CAS
configuration can be sent to the device.
EIS-SCS Port Define the TCP port through which NSG communicates with the
EIS. Valid values range between 1-65535.
CP Duration (sec) The Crypto Period defines how often the NSG changes the control
word (or "key") for encrypted services. The default CP duration is 15
seconds and you can enter the required value.Valid values range
between 1-6554.
ECMG Failover
Retries
CA Descriptor
Location
Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to establish
communication with the Entitlement Control Message Generator
(ECMG) before issuing the alarm ECMG Connection Failure.
Select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA
descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in
both levels.
CAS Type Select either of the following:
Session based - default option. The EIS is external and it issues
an SCG for each service for which encryption is required. When
selected, the DVB Session based features are enabled.
Tier based - all services are scrambled with the same control
word and ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the
DVB Tier Based features are enabled.
Clear to Scramble
Period
Enter the clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the
service, once the SCG is received. Valid values range between 0-
9999. The default value is 0 seconds.
Block Upon Failure Applies to DVB Tier based. Select Block Upon Failure, to allow the
device to block the stream to protect the content. When a stream is
blocked, no picture appears on the end user screen. This action
takes place in case the NSG 9000 could not establish
communication with the ECMG
Failed to Scramble
Timeout
In Failed to Scramble Timeout (Sec), define the period of time
between outputting the service and recognizing CAS failure. When
CAS failure is recognized the following takes place:
Scrambling with the last available ECM
Block the stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and Block
Upon Failure is selected.
Outflow a clear stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and
Block Upon Failure is not selected.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 172 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters
Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling Parameters
Parameter Explanation
TS ID Provisioning Applies to DVB Session Based. In TS ID Provisioning, select how to
generate the TS ID to be provisioned:
Direct - The default option. The provisioned TS ID is the same as
the output TS ID.
By QAM Index - The provisioned TS ID is according to the QAM
number that is a number between 1-144.
6.17.3.3 Configuring ECMs in DVB Tier Based Mode
NSG 9000-6G supports SimulCrypt in DVB Tier Based mode and it allows to encrypt the
content with up to 3 different Conditional Access Systems. You can define up to three ECMs
each with its own Access Criteria.
Table 6-32: DVB CAS Tier Based
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the device
Active Select to enable the ECM record.
ECM PID Enter the ECM PID.
SuperCAS ID (Hex) Enter the Super CAS ID of the ECMG as provided
by the vendor.
Access Criteria (Hex) Enter an access criteria as provided by the vendor.
6.17.3.4 Defining ECMGs and NSG 9000 Communication Parameters
This section instructs you on how to define the ECMG & NSG 9000 communication
parameters.
Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG 9000-6G Communication Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the device
ECMG No. A sequential number of the ECMG device connected to the
NSG. You can add up to 10 ECMGs.
Active Select to enable the record.
Name Enter the name of the ECMG brand.
SuperCAS ID A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA
vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes
one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The
super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with
each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.
Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1, 2 or 3
for SimulCrypt Ver. 1, 2 or 3 respectively.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 173 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring SNMP Parameters
Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG 9000-6G Communication Parameters
Parameter Explanation
IP Address The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this
value.
Port The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect
the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.
Channel ID
Channel ID Indicates the channel of communication between the NSG and
the ECMG.
6.18 Configuring SNMP Parameters
The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to
communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it
when required.
The SNMP table allows you to create the following:
A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have
accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.
To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for
the Get community is public.
By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to
monitor specific groups of devices.
To set SNMP parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-34: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable
SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.
Contact Enter contact information
Location
(SysLocation)
Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the
host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.
Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network
elements. The elements will respond to this community Get
commands. The default string is public.
Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 174 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Device Authentication
Table 6-34: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.
For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page 63.
6.19 Device Authentication
NSG 9000 may use a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server to
authenticate and authorize users who are trying to log into the NSG 9000.
To configure RADIUS username and password for a mass of devices, use the Authentication
tab.
To configure the RADIUS username and password for a single device, use the Authentication
tab per device.
NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT
Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details
entered in the Authentication tab of the device.
To enable the RADIUS authentication, the following should apply:
Connection to a RADIUS server - NSG is defined as a client of the RADIUS server
NSG 9000 is configured to work in Remote mode
The RADIUS server database should include three types of authorized NSG users. Any
user defined in the RADIUS server must belong to one of these groups:
Admin
Config
Guest
To set Authentication parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is
NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.
2. In Details, select the Authentication tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 6-35: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 175 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Device Authentication
Table 6-35: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Authentication Type Open the Authentication Type list and select either of the following:
Local - authentication and authorization is performed locally,
against the database of the NSG 9000-6G
Remote-RADIUS - authentication and authorization is performed
by the RADIUS server. When selected, move to the following step
to configure the required parameters.
Username Enter the username as defined on the RADIUS server
Password Enter the password as defined on the RADIUS server
RADIUS Server IP Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server
RADIUS Port Enter the port number over which the RADIUS sever
communicates with the NSG 9000.
RADIUS Secret Enter a confidential string that is shared between the device and
the RADIUS server.
RADIUS Timeout Enter in seconds, the time allowed to elapse between an NSG
9000 request and a response from the RADIUS server.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 176 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Overview
7.1 Overview
Chapter 7
Configuring NSG 9000-40G
Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear
as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs
and their attributes according to the most recent available version.
7.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters on page 177
7.3 Configuring Management Port on page 179
7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports on page 180
7.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G on page 180
7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 183
7.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters on page 185
7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 187
7.9 Configuring the VOD Application on page 190
7.10 Configuring SDV Parameters on page 192
7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page 192
7.12 Defining Virtual Devices on page 194
7.13 Setting Device Time and Date on page 197
7.14 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 198
7.15 Configuring Broadcast Parameters on page 199
7.16 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 201
7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 201
7.18 Configuring CAS Parameters on page 202
7.19 Configuring SNMP Parameters on page 203
7.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters
Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start
configuring the device via MCT.
To set platform parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 177 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Setting NSG Platform Parameters
.
Table 7-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
ETH1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board
Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.
Main Board FPGA Version Read only. The FPGA version as retrieved from the
device.
LLC Version Read only. Indicates the embedded version of the
controller
Power Supply 1 Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on
page 179 shows.
Power Supply 2 Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on
page 179 shows.
Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2
protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores
any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any
IGMPv3 messages.
Use DTI Clock From version 3.2 and up. Select to enslave NSG 9000
clock to the DTI clock.
DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the
Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following:
Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No
automatic switching/activation of ports is done,
regardless of the status of the DTI ports.
Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port
is completely automatic, without any intervention and
without any preference of a specific port. If the active
port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes
the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If
the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This
switching can continue any number of times, without
any preference of a specific port.
Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected
port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred
over the other port. In case that the selected port
fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once
the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically
switches back to the selected port.
DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list
and select either port 1 or 2.
The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto
Revert) is selected.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 178 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Management Port
Table 7-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-40G
Enable Syslog Select to enable communication with the Syslog server.
Syslog Server IP Address Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP
address of the Syslog server.
Enable HTTPS Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you
to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol.
Enable HTTP Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin
may disable it via the Web client of the device.
Table 7-2: Power Supply Type Web Client Indication
Power Supply
Type
Parameter Explanation
Web Client
Indication
7.3 Configuring Management Port
The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000-40G primary IP address is configured as part
of the NSG 9000-40G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address
settings.
NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports
to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000-40G uses the
ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access
Systems (CAS) purposes.
To change configuration of ETH1
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.
3. In Eth1, enter the required IP address.
4. Send to device.
Comments
AC 500/665W AC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W.
Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply
labeling.
DC 500/665W DC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W.
Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply
labeling.
AC 800W-Ven2
DC 800W-Ven2
AC 800W-Ven1
DC 800W-Ven1
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 179 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Ethernet Ports
To define additional parameters of the management port, see 7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports
on page 180.
7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below:
7.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G
NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and up is furnished with eight GbE input ports. The GbE ports
operate as eight independent ports receiving eight different feeds. The input rate of the GbE
ports is as follows:
GbE 1-4 - 1G
GbE 5-8 - 1G/10G (configurable)
NSG 9000-40G version 3.0 supports four GbE input ports only.
7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy
7.5.1.1 Overview
Table 7-3: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
Eth1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently
configured Eth1 port.
MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.
Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port
Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway
Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2
Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address
Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address
DNS Server IP
Address
Applies to NSG9000-40G version 3.2.3 and up. Enter the
IP of the Domain Name Server. This applies when the
EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture. See
7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 201.
NSG 9000-40G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port
redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the
following scenarios describe:
VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use
1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP
Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active.
SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP mulicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and
N:1 redundancy modes:
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 180 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G
1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same
IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This
mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures.
N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports,
by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and
recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports
and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up
ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the
streams of the failed primary port(s).
If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, the backup port transmits
the content of the first failed primary port only and overflow of the backup port is
prevented.
NOTE: Beware that GbE ports 1-4 are of 1G and GbE ports 5-8 are of either 1 or 10G.
In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature:
A primary port cannot serve as a backup port
If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out. When the primary
port fails, the backup port is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port.
Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In case Same IP Address is
selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port
IP address.
NOTE: Verify that the capacity of the backup port matches or exceeds the actual capacity of the primary
port.
Alarm configuration:
By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy.
The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same.
You can configure the alarms of a primary port only.
When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also
applies to the backup port.
In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all
of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an
additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary
port.
Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and
to all primary ports it backs up.
To configure the NSG 9000-40G GbE ports
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE tab.
3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:
NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only.
Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 181 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G
Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
GbE No. Read only. Displays the number of the active port.
Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are
active.
Enable Port Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does
not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.
Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.
Speed Applies to 10GbE only (GbE5-GbE8). Open the list and select the
required speed. Changes to the speed, require device reboot:
1Gbps
10Gbps
Auto Negotiation Applies to 1G speed. When Same IP is checked, you cannot apply
Auto Negotiation.
Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation
is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE
links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a
GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be
cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a
device that does not use it causes communication problems.
IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is
other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected
QAM mapping mode.
IP Mask The subnet mask.
Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway
of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10
seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.
Refresh Interval Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request.
NGOD Input
Group Name
NGOD Assigned
Bandwidth(Mbps)
Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.
Applies to NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and up.
Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM.
The default is 1000MB for both 1G and 10G GbE ports. If the
assigned bandwidth is 1000M/10,000M the full capacity of the 1G/
10G port is assigned for the NGOD ERM, respectively. You can enter
a value between 0-1000/0-10,000 in increments of 100,
respectively. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for the
NGOD ERM.
Backup Port If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port
X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a
backup to more than one primary port.
Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are
provisioned to the port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 182 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
Same IP In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams,
you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for
each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked.
Once you select Same IP Address the following takes place:
The IP address of the backup port changes to the IP address of
the primary port
The backup port is disabled
The routing tables of the primary port are copied to the backup
port routing tables. Once Same IP Address is unchecked, the
routing tables of the backup port are removed.
Trigger Link
Down
Trigger No Input
Traffic
By default Link Down is checked and when the alarm is raised, it
triggers port redundancy. Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger
redundancy.
By default No Input Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it
triggers port redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not
trigger redundancy.
7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information
about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab
are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.
The available 24 QAM-RF channels of each RF port are divided into groups. The QAM
channels of each group share the same configuration: ITU-T Annex, constellation, symbol rate
and interleaver. Group configuration applies to both RF ports of the module. Currently the
default groups are:
Table 7-5: Available QAM-RF Groups
Group ITU-T Annex Operation Mode
2x4 QAM-RF channels
1x9 QAM-RF channels
2x6 QAM-RF channels
1x12 QAM-RF channels
A 4A-4A-9A
B 6B-6B-12B
To view and configure RF module parameters
1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)
2. Select the RF Module tab.
3. View/configure the following information:
Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 183 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters
Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
Slot No. Read only. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a
number between 1- 9.
Actual Card Read only. Indicates the actual module type. NSG-40G
supports the NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card
that supports up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port.
Expected Card Read only. Indicates the configured module type.
Serial Number Read only. The serial number of the mounted module. This
field is populated after Get from Device only.
Operation Mode Open the list and select the required QAM-RFs group. The
default is 6B-6B-12B
RF Template Open the list to select the required RF template:
Frequency - frequency is entered explicitly as numeric
frequency values
EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers
based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and
EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.
EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers
based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA-STD and
EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.
When changing the RF Template to EIS-STD or EIA-HRC,
MCT checks if the frequencies of each port matches the
EIA table. If not, a message appears notifying that all
frequencies are set to the default frequency according to
the EIA channel. In addition, all RF Ports are disabled.
Group 1 Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex:
Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European
and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per
QAM-RF channel.
Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American
countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF
channel.
Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in
Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes
bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.
Group 1Constellation To define the required constellation, open the
Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM
constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must
be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values
are:
Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Annex-B 64 and 256
Group 1Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded
and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol
rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its
value.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 184 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters
Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
Group 1Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab.
NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the
required value for this interleaver.
Group 1Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1
Group 2 Annex See Group 1 Annex
Group 2 Constellation See Group 1 Constellation
Group 2 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Symbol rate
Group 2 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1
Group 2 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver 2
Group 3 Annex See Group 1 Annex
Group 3 Constellation See Group 1 Constellation
Group 3 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Symbol Rate
Group 3 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1
Group 3 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver 2
7.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters
Each RF Port spans across 384MHz transmission frequency of the 1GHz spectrum (to be
accurate 50MHZ-1GHz).
You can locate along the spectrum, for each RF port, its Span window = 384MHz divided into
steps of 6MHz for Annex B or 8MHz for Annex A. You can set the Span window with
accuracy of up to 1Khz along the 1GHz spectrum. For example 228.001 - 612.001.
Once you defined the Span window, locate the available QAM channels along this span
window while each QAM channel utilizes six MHz in Annex B. For example, if the Span
Window = 384 MHz and Span Start = 228 MHz, you can configure QAM channels with any
frequency between 228Mhz - 612 MHz. However, the frequency of the QAM channels is
defined according to the center frequency. In this case, the first QAM channel valid frequency
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 185 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters
is 231MHz in steps of 6MHz. For example:
231, 237, 243…
You can locate the QAMs any where along the Span window. For example, QAM #4 can be
located at 255MHz.
For Annex B, QAM frequency is calculated according to the following formula:
fQAM = SpanStart + 3MHz + n*6MHz

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 7-7: RF Port tab - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
Optimized ACP To apply ACP (Adjacent Channel Protection), select this
option. If ACP is applied, # QAMs per Port, is disabled.
The device automatically balances the RF gain chain
according to the number of currently active QAMs.
However, if you mute a channel, while Optimized ACP is
selected, a momentary disruption to video on other
channels may ensue.
Power Level Per QAM
(dBmV)
Power Level Per QAM
(dBuV)
7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters
MCT creates a record for each transport stream. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of
24 QAM numbers.
To define the out TS parameters
Define the QAM power level for all QAM channels within
the port. View the allowed range next to the Power Level
Per QAM box
Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dBuV. Once you
enter the power level per QAM in dBmV, this parameter is
updated to display the power level also in dBuV. Applies
to NSG9000-40G version 3.2.0.0 and up.
Enable Variable Equalizer Select Variable Equalizer to enable the Cable Attenuation
option.
Cable Attenuation (dB) To yield the best frequency flatness at the end of the
cable, open the Cable Attenuation list and select a value
where the cable attenuation provides pre-emphasis to
high frequencies. To flatten the residual frequency ripple/
tilt, refer to User Attenuation in Table 7-8 on page 187.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.
Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G
Field Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
QAM Index Read only. Displays the number of the QAM channels of the
QAM-RF module in a sequential order from 1-648. Currently, the
QAMs are listed in groups of 24 with jumps of 12 QAMs in
between each group.
Slot No. Read only and a linked parameter.
Indicated the number of the slot on which the module is mounted.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 187 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G
Field Explanation
Port Number Read only and a linked parameter. Each QAM-RF module has two
ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF
port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware
User’s Guide.
QAM No. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential order in
relation to the QAM channels in the port, from 1-24.
# QAMs Per Port A linked parameter. Indicates the number of QAM channels, from
1-24 Annex B, or 1-17 Annex A, that can be activated, turned On/
Off.
TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535.
This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given
TS, to comply with the DVB standard.
Group (Annex/
Constellation/SR)
Read only. Indicates the group this TS belongs to in the following
pattern:
Group number (Annex/Constellation/Symbol Rate)
QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The
default QAM manager is VOD SRM. You can select one of the
QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 7-
9: QAM Manager on page 189.
Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is
provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this
database to NMX template. Once you export this database to
NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate
statistical reports.
Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits
(range of 1- 65535). See Table 7-10 on page 190.
EIA Type Read only, linked parameter. Displays the EIA type as configured
in the RF Module tab.
EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as
defined in the EIA standard.
When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not
comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.
RF Freq. (MHz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA
channel number configured in EIA Freq.
You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears
in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100.
User Attenuation(dB) To flatten the residual frequency ripple/tilt, open the list and select
the required value. The available range is between 0-2 dB with
steps of 0.1dB.
Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM
signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:
ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17
In ANNEX-B, Interleaver value depens on the constellation
Constellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, 128-1
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 188 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters
Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G
Spectral Inversion The spectral inversion is an advanced QAM configuration
parameter. If checked, spectral inversion is enabled
QAM On By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the
QAM, de-select the required QAM On box.
CW Select for testing purposes only. Enabled if QAM On is selected.
PM Enable Check to enable Motorola Privacy mode for this TS.
NGOD QAM Group
Name
Table 7-9: QAM Manager
QAM-RF
Manager
VOD SRM
(default)
Enter the QAM-group name that the NSG reports on via its
NGOD-D6 messages.
Application Explanation
VOD
Service & PID
Remux
NGOD ERM VOD
SDV
Service & PID
Remux
ISA SRM SDV
VOD
Service & PID
Remux
Pass Through
(not
supported)
VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the
incoming streams and automatically routes them,
according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-
RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is
controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager).
The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service
remux or PID remux.
The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding
SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM
may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD
ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled
by selecting Applications > NGOD.
All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service
Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are
provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may
also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID
remux.
Pass Through The incoming stream is streamed out without any
changes, that is without generating new tables, services
or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough
manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP
port.
M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled
by the CMTS.
D2E (not
supported)
Field Explanation
D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 189 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the VOD Application
NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this
QAM-RF.
7.9 Configuring the VOD Application
Configure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000-40G device serves as a highly integrated
digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP
network.
To configure VOD parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device
2. In Details, select the VOD tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-10: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Encryption Mode Select either of the following:
DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method
PM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method
Note: currently only PM scrambling is available.
Emulation Template By default, for VOD streams, autodetected is enabled and
the streams are multiplexed to the required QAM,
according to the UDP port number. However, you can set
the QAM mapping method as follows:
Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the
10MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and
the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed
ranges are: QAM-RF 0-1023, Service ID 0-63.
NSG 9000-6G - a QAM mapping that allows NSG
9000-40G to emulate six NSG 9000-6G devices.
Custom - you can prepare your own QAM mapping
file and load it to the NSG. The streams are out
flowing according to the QAM mapping defined in the
customized file. You can edit the file via MCT Options.
See 3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File on
page 60.
Note: Any changes to the Custom file requires to import
it to the device.
Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM
mapping the 8MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF
output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the
allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID 0-63.
Service ID Base Enter the first service in the mapping range. The default
is 1.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 190 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the VOD Application
Table 7-10: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-40G
Parameter Explanation
PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or
the Random options to govern the method elementary
streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen
option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See,
4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.
From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower
limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the
upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal
format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to
0x1FF0.
PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams.
PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT
packets are sent over the NSG's output transport
streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value
chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will
round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.
Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version.
This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is
changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).
Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at
the output.
Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters
are enabled:
Original Network ID
Serving Area Location in SAT
Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits
(range of 1- 65535). See Table 7-8 on page 187.
Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.
Serving Area Location in
SAT
If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location
in SAT list and select one of the following:
TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID.
First Service Name - the serving area is written to the
first service name
Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and
the first service name.
Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.
Session Inactivity Teardown
Threshold (sec)
Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session
inactivity before the session is removed from the output.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 191 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SDV Parameters
7.10 Configuring SDV Parameters
NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the
service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:
Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group.
Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.
Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not
detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time
is longer.
To define SDV redundancy parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SDV tab.
3. Configure the following parameters:
Table 7-11: SDV Redundancy parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
NGOD
Redundancy
Mode
ISA Redundancy
Mode
Select one of the following modes:
Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one
redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and
upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the
backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of
the device.
Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000
JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both
groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device
inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.
Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant
services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon
failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result
the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails,
NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.
Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services.
NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services
are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.
See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation. Currently disabled.
7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication
To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the ISA tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 192 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring ISA-Device Communication
3. Configure the following parameters:
Table 7-12: NSG 9000-40G and ISA SRM communication
Firmware
Version
Parameter Explanation
N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
N/A Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server
(either ERM or SRM) upon reset.
N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.
N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the
duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA
server.
N/A Report PMT Section
(QuerySessionInfo)
Up to
version
3.1
Input Port for Shell
Session
Input Port for Shell
Session 2
Ver. 3.1 SDV Load-sharing Port
A
SDV Load-sharing Port
B
When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet
data is sent to the ISA server.
Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input port
indicated in the Input Port for Shell Session box. The
default port is port 1.
Optional configuration. Configure this parameter
when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the
NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for
SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input
port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are
equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic
to the port defined as the first input port for Shell
sessions.
Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input port
indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.
Optional configuration. Configure this parameter
when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the
NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for
SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input
port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are
equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic
to the port defined as the first input port for SDV
sessions.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 193 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices
Table 7-12: NSG 9000-40G and ISA SRM communication
Firmware
Version
Ver. 3.2
and up
SDV Load-Sharing Port
A - D
N/A Enable Announce
Message
7.12 Defining Virtual Devices
The virtual device feature allows either of the following:
VOD - allows to use UDP QAM mapping of legacy NSG devices with NSG9000-40G as
the edgeQAM.
ISA server - allows the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgQAM.
To create virtual IPs, do the following unless you are using the physical management port IP
or the physical GbE port IP for the virtual devices:
Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a
subnet other than Eth2 subnet. You can add up to 18 Eth1 virtual IPs.
GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the active GbE ports. You can add
up to 10 GbE virtual IPs.
NOTE: In VOD - each GbE port has a unique QAM mapping scheme.
In ISA - all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping.
Create virtual devices
7.12.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs
Parameter Explanation
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the
provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM
attempts to receive the input stream via the input
ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D
boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV
Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE
input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV
traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the
selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to
the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV
ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends
the traffic to the ports according to the sequential
order of the port numbers.
NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a
sequential order from one to eight. Port number can
be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0
as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0.
NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load
sharing port, cannot be a backup port.
Check to enable the announce message indication
required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This
message is sent to the SRM due to the following:
Provisioning a service
Alarm is raised on the session
A redundancy switch over the session source
Session is missing from the output
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 194 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices
2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 7-13: NSG 9000-40G Eth1 Virtual IPs
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
Virtual IP Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be
unique.
Mask Enter a subnet mask
Status In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP:
In Use - the virtual IP is currently in use
No in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use
7.12.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 7-14: NSG 9000-40G GbE Virtual IPs
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
GbE Port Enter the GbE port number.
Virtual IP Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual
IPs. You can also select
Mask Enter the required mask IP
Management IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port
7.12.3 Creating Virtual Devices
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices tab.
The Sort button is enabled. See page 19.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 195 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices
4. Configure the following parameters:
Table 7-15: NSG 9000-40G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Virtual Device Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
Eth1 Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The
list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously.
VOD/ISA Mode Open the QAM Manager list and select the required QAM
manager. Select either VOD, for VOD systems and ISA for ISA
SRM systems.
In case of ISA, all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping
scheme.
In case of VOD, each GbE port has its unique QAM mapping
scheme.
GbE Port: Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is
propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The
GbE interface appears in the following format:
:, where x is the physical GbE port of the
edgeQAM, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE
interface. To allow load balancing, select 0-Load Balancing.
Bitmap/Encoded In ISA, only Encoded is available.
In VOD, select one of the following methods to present the output:
Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the
NSG. The Output TS is determined by the bit that is set to 1. For
example, TS 8 is represented by 10000000, TS 3 by
00000100 and TS 9 by 00000001.
Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of
the MSB. For example, TS 8 is represented by 00001000, TS 3
by 00000011 and TS 9 by 00001001.
QAM Mapping Click to open a subsection - ISA QAM Mapping for Virtual Device
#. See Table 7-16 on page 197.
Virtual Input Port Applies to ISA SRM only. Enter the required port according to the
ISA provisioning.
Enable Reset
Indication
Applies to ISA SRM only. In Enable Reset Indication, check to enable
this message required by the RPC protocol for the virtual device.
This message is sent to the SRM who manages the device, after
device reset or after management communication is back in case
of communication problems. By default this parameter is off.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 196 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Setting Device Time and Date
Table 7-15: NSG 9000-40G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices
Parameter Explanation
Reset Ind. Mac
Address
Table 7-16: QAM Mapping
7.13 Setting Device Time and Date
Applies to ISA SRM only. Reset Ind. MAC Addr. - the MAC Address
of the management port of the device/virtual device. This MAC
address appears in the Reset Indication message only to identify
the device. Once you click Enable Reset Indication, the Reset Ind.
MAC Address is calculated as follows:
Reset Indication MAC Address
First two bytes = First two bytes of the Eth1 MAC address
Four last bytes= The IP address of the Eth1/virtual Eth1 in
hexadecimal.
For example: Reset Indication is 00:90:0a:28:17:b1, where:
00:90 - derived from the MAC address of Eth1, which is
00:90:F0:02:12:A8
0a:28:17:b1 - the IP address of the virtual Eth1, which is
10.40.23.177. In hex = 0a:28:17:b1.
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Virtual Device Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.
QAM Mapping Index A sequential number to indicate the QAM index per virtual
device.
Virtual QAM In Virtual QAM, enter the QAM number (1-255) in the
provisioning message.
The UDP Port Range is automatically displayed.
Physical QAM In Physical QAM, enter the physical QAM to output the
content. Indicate the physical QAM in the following pattern:
x.y.z, where
x - module number, an integer between 1-9
y - port number, an integer between 1-2
z - QAM channel number, an integer between 1-24
UDP Port Range Applies to VOD only. Once you enter the virtual QAM, the
UDP port range is automatically displayed.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Time tab.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 197 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Network Routing Parameters
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-17: Device Time Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port
Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP
server, select Enable NTP.
NTP Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
Enable Daylight Saving Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location
and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving
time is automatically defined according to the selected
location and city/province.
Time Offset Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open
the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to
match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and
the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Location Select the required location.
City/Province Select the required city/province.
7.14 Configuring Network Routing Parameters
Once you add an NSG device, 20 blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each
GbE/Eth port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with
components, such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. You can define up to 20
routing IP addresses for each NSG.
NOTE: You cannot configure a routing table for a port that serves as a backup port with Same IP
enabled. See 7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 180.
To configure network route parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Routing tab.
3. Configure the required parameters as explained below:
Table 7-18: Network Routing Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Routing No. An index number for each routing record.
Active Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select
the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters.
Destination Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the
destination device.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 198 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 7-18: Network Routing Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Mask Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the
gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG
ETH2 port.
Interface Select the port the routing is associated with. You can select
one of the following: Eth1/2, GbE1-8.
7.15 Configuring Broadcast Parameters
In Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000-40G allows to manually route various content
elements to any output QAM channel. NSG 9000-40G allows to create the following types of
sessions:
Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab
PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab.
7.15.1 Defining Service Remux Sessions
NSG9000-40G supports RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) sessions provisioned over
RTSP protocol. NSG9000-40G supports up to 2000 NGOD sessions.
You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to:
Output the service with its input ID or to remap it.
Remap the service PIDs.
NSG9000-40G supports RTSP provision with alternate sources. See 7.10 Configuring SDV
Parameters on page 192.
When provisioning sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000.
To route a service
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-19: Service Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the
number of the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected,
the IP address is removed from the IP Address box.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 199 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Broadcast Parameters
Table 7-19: Service Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Output QAM
No.
7.15.2 Defining PID Remux Sessions
You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can select whether to add a PMT
reference to the PID.
You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different
outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.
The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and
remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000-40G ignores any of
the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and added descriptor.
NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.
To configure a PID Remux Session
Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-648, to output the
session.
Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with
the same input ID number or to remap the service.
No PID
Remap
To output a service without remapping its PIDs, select No PID Remap.
If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the
output.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
NOTE: Expected Firmware Version should be 3.2.1 and up.
2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.
3. Click Add. A blank row is added.
4. Define the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-20: PID Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 1, to indicate the number of
the session in the current page.
Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected,
the IP address is removed from the IP Address box and a default
multicast IP address appears.
GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.
IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 200 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters
Table 7-20: PID Remux Session
Parameter Explanation
UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.
Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content
to the defined GbE port and socket
Input PID
(Hex)
Output QAM
No.
Output PID
(Hex)
PMT
Reference
Enter the PID at the input.
7.16 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters
See 6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 167.
7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters
When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the
following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:
Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.
Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See
7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 187.
To configure NGOD parameters
Open the list and select the required QAM-RF channel in the following
format: X.Y.Z where:
X – module number (1…9)
Y – RF port number (1..2)
Z – channel number (1…24 - Annex B/17Annex A)
Enter the required ID, in hexameter, of the ES at the output. You can
output the PID with the same input ID or to remap the PID
To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box.
PID 0x10 is excluded. It does not support PMT reference and added
descriptor.
ES Type Enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the
PMT table points to. See, Standard ES Types and Descriptors on
page 206.
Descriptors Enter the required descriptor as defined by the MPEG standard. See
A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) on page 206.
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.
3. Define the parameters as explained below.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 201 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring CAS Parameters
NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD
protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).
Table 7-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 -40G
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.
Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol
NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol
Bandwidth Update
Threshold (kbps)
7.18 Configuring CAS Parameters
The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by
scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG
9000-40G supports the following CAS systems:
Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc.
DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.
Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit
rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches
the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the
updated output bit rate.
Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255).
Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the
Enable ERM (D6) box.
ERM Address Enter the ERM IP address. From NSG9000-40G version
3.2.3 and up, you can also enter the name of the ERM.
You can enter up to 100 characters. If you entered the
ERM name, NSG9000-40G obtains the IP address of the
required ERM from the DNS (Domain Name Server). See
7.3 Configuring Management Port on page 179.
ERM IP Port Enter the ERM TCP port number
ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is
the default version.
ERM Keep Alive Read only. A period of time in seconds to indicate the
duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by
the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.
Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6
messages
Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration
between responses to successive Keep Alive and or
UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration
time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to
re-establish the connection with the ERM.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 202 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters
To select CAS mode, see 6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode on page 170.
To configure DVB CAS, see 6.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS on page 171.
For Privacy Mode general overview, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103.
To configure PM parameters, see 7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters on page 203.
7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-22: Privacy Mode Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.
Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).
VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs
to.
Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days
that have passed since the expiration of the
current callback is larger than the value
indicated in this field.
ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number.
When this number changes, a new ECM is
generated.
ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to
check whether a new ECM was generated.
Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new
ECM or callback.
Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following:
Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the
VODS should be updated with the new
ECM.
Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the
stream.
7.19 Configuring SNMP Parameters
The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to
communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it
when required.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 203 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters
The SNMP table allows you to create the following:
A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have
accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.
To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for
the Get community is public.
By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to
monitor specific groups of devices.
To set SNMP parameters
1. In Device Information, select the required device.
2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.
3. Configure the parameters as explained below:
Table 7-23: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.
Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable
SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.
Contact Enter contact information
Location
(SysLocation)
Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the
host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.
Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network
elements. The elements will respond to this community Get
commands. The default string is public.
Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
Host 2 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 2 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
Enable Host 2 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
Host 3 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
Host 3 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
Enable Host 3 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
Host 4 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward
all SNMP traps from the NSG.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 204 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters
Table 7-23: SNMP Parameters
Parameter Explanation
Host 4 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.
Enable Host 4 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the
NSG.
NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 205 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

A.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types
Appendix A
Standard ES Types and Descriptors
The following standards are used to define types of elementary stream:
Value Description
0x0 ITU-T | ISO/IEC Reserved
0x1 I S O/ I E C 11172 Video
0x2 ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC
11172-2 constrained parameter video stream
0x3 I S O/ I E C 11172 Audio
0x4 ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio
0x5 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 private_sections
0x6 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets
containing private data
0x7 ISO/IEC 13522 MHEG
0x8 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Annex A DSM
CC
0x9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1
0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A
0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B
0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C
0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D
0xE ISO/IEC 13818-1 auxiliary
0xF-0x7F ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Reserved
0x80 - 0xFF User Private
A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG)
The following MPEG standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:
Value Description
0x2 Video stream descriptor
0x3 audio stream descriptor
0x4 hierarchy descriptor
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 206 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)
Value Description
0x5 registration descriptor
0x6 data stream alignment descriptor
0x7 target background grid descriptor
0x8 video window descriptor
0x9 CA descriptor
0xA ISO 639 descriptor
0xB system clock descriptor
0xC multiplex buffer utilization descriptor
0xD copyright descriptor
0xF private data indicator descriptor
0x10 smoothing buffer descriptor
0x12 IBP descriptor
A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)
The following DVB standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:
Value Description
0x51 Mosaic descriptor
0x52 Stream identifier descriptor
0x56 Teletext descriptor
0x59 Subtitling descriptor
0x5F Private data specifier
0x60 Service move descriptor
0x65 CA system descriptor
0x66 Data broadcast ID descriptor
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 207 MCT , Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B
EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
The EIA (Electronic Industries Association) sets internationally recognized standards for
standard frequencies (EIA STD) and for Harmonic related carriers (EIA HRC).
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
1 ------- 73.7500
2 57.0000 55.7500
3 63.0000 61.7500
4 69.0000 67.7500
5 79.0000 79.7500
6 85.0000 85.7500
7 177.0000 175.7500
8 183.0000 181.7500
9 189.0000 187.7500
10 195.0000 193.7500
11 201.0000 199.7500
12 207.0000 205.7500
13 213.0000 211.7500
14 123.0000 121.7500
15 129.0000 127.7500
16 135.0000 133.7500
17 141.0000 139.7500
18 147.0000 145.7500
19 153.0000 151.7500
20 159.0000 157.7500
21 165.0000 163.7500
22 171.0000 169.7500
23 219.0000 217.7500
24 225.0000 223.7500
25 231.0000 229.7500
26 237.0000 235.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 208 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
27 243.0000 241.7500
28 249.0000 247.7500
29 255.0000 253.7500
30 261.0000 259.7500
31 267.0000 265.7500
32 273.0000 271.7500
33 279.0000 277.7500
34 285.0000 283.7500
35 291.0000 289.7500
36 297.0000 295.7500
37 303.0000 301.7500
38 309.0000 307.7500
39 315.0000 313.7500
40 321.0000 319.7500
41 327.0000 325.7500
42 333.0000 331.7500
43 339.0000 337.7500
44 345.0000 343.7500
45 351.0000 349.7500
46 357.0000 355.7500
47 363.0000 361.7500
48 369.0000 367.7500
49 375.0000 373.7500
50 381.0000 379.7500
51 387.0000 385.7500
52 393.0000 391.7500
53 399.0000 397.7500
54 405.0000 403.7500
55 411.0000 409.7500
56 417.0000 415.7500
57 423.0000 421.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 209 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
58 429.0000 427.7500
59 435.0000 433.7500
60 441.0000 439.7500
61 447.0000 445.7500
62 453.0000 451.7500
63 459.0000 457.7500
64 465.0000 463.7500
65 471.0000 469.7500
66 477.0000 475.7500
67 483.0000 481.7500
68 489.0000 487.7500
69 495.0000 493.7500
70 501.0000 499.7500
71 507.0000 505.7500
72 513.0000 511.7500
73 519.0000 517.7500
74 525.0000 523.7500
75 531.0000 529.7500
76 537.0000 535.7500
77 543.0000 541.7500
78 549.0000 547.7500
79 555.0000 553.7500
80 561.0000 559.7500
81 567.0000 565.7500
82 573.0000 571.7500
83 579.0000 577.7500
84 585.0000 583.7500
85 591.0000 589.7500
86 597.0000 595.7500
87 603.0000 601.7500
88 609.0000 607.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 210 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
89 615.0000 613.7500
90 621.0000 619.7500
91 627.0000 625.7500
92 633.0000 631.7500
93 639.0000 637.7500
94 645.0000 643.7500
95 93.0000 91.7500
96 99.0000 97.7500
97 105.0000 103.7500
98 111.0000 109.7500
99 117.0000 115.7500
100 651.0000 649.7500
101 657.0000 655.7500
102 663.0000 661.7500
103 669.0000 667.7500
104 675.0000 673.7500
105 681.0000 679.7500
106 687.0000 685.7500
107 693.0000 691.7500
108 699.0000 697.7500
109 705.0000 703.7500
110 711.0000 709.7500
111 717.0000 715.7500
112 723.0000 721.7500
113 729.0000 727.7500
114 735.0000 733.7500
115 741.0000 739.7500
116 747.0000 745.7500
117 753.0000 751.7500
118 759.0000 757.7500
119 765.0000 763.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 211 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
120 771.0000 769.7500
121 777.0000 775.7500
122 783.0000 781.7500
123 789.0000 787.7500
124 795.0000 793.7500
125 801.0000 799.7500
126 807.0000 805.7500
127 813.0000 811.7500
128 819.0000 817.7500
129 825.0000 823.7500
130 831.0000 829.7500
131 837.0000 835.7500
132 843.0000 841.7500
133 849.0000 847.7500
134 855.0000 853.7500
135 861.0000 859.7500
136 867.0000 865.7500
137 873.0000 871.7500
138 879.000 877.7500
139 885.000 883.7500
140 891.000 889.7500
141 897.000 895.7500
142 903.000 901.7500
143 909.000 907.7500
144 915.000 913.7500
145 921.000 919.7500
146 927.000 925.7500
147 933.000 931.7500
148 939.000 937.7500
149 945.000 943.7500
150 951.000 949.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 212 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps
Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC
EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz
151 957.000 955.7500
152 963.000 961.7500
153 969.000 967.7500
154 975.000 973.7500
155 981.000 979.7500
156 987.000 985.7500
157 993.000 991.7500
158 999.000 997.7500
© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 213 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Harmonic Inc.
549 Baltic Way
Sunnyvale, CA 94089, U.S.A.
T +1 408 542 2500
F +1 408 490 6708
www.harmonicinc.com
© Copyright 2007 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.
Manual Part No. 700-000XXXX